BRITISH CHEMICAL ABSTRACTSB.—APPLIED CHEMISTRY

FEB. 15 and 22, 1935 *

I.— GENERAL; PLANT; MACHINERY.Heat transm ission through bare and insulated

furnace walls. R. H. H e il m a n (Chem. Met. Eng., 1934, 41, 637—641).—Graphs of the emissivity of black paint (177—590°), white paint (177—790°), chrome brick (590—1090°), light buff brick (540—1090°), and a white refractory (kaolin + A120 3) (790—-1090°), and of the lieat-transmission coeff. of different substances (calc, from published data) plotted against temp, are given. An example of the method of calculating the temp, gradient from the flame in a furnace to the outer wall (composed of three materials) surface is worked out, D. K. M.

Heat transfer and food-plant design. B. H eastie (Food, 1934,4, 110—112 ; 1935, 4, 163—165).—A dis­cussion on heat transmission, with examples, some of which illustrate the effect of enamel, glass, and stainless- steel linings of Fe tanks on heat transfer and in which recently determined coeffs. are used. D. K. M.

Spray-dryer design and operation. H . Lew is (Food, 1934,4,107—109 ; 1935,4,161—162).—Different types of atomisers and their effects on the mixing of the spray and hot gases, and the effect of degree of atomis­ation, concn. of solution, and temp, of gas and solution on the packing density of the product arc discussed. There appears to be an optimum particle size for rapid dis­solution of the product. Countercurrent flow with spray drying is difficult to obtain. There are three kinds of drying, during which the rate of evaporation is con­trolled by (1) the rate of diffusion in the gas of vapour formed a t the surface of the drop saturated with II20, (2) the rate of diffusion of H20 from the interior to the surface, (3) the rate of diffusion of vapour formed in the interior through the outer solid shell. The smaller is the mol. wt. of the drying gas the greater is the rate of evaporation. D. K. M.

Industrial microscopy. VI. Oils, fats, waxes, resins, and asphalts. C. H. B utcher (Ind. Chem., 1934,10 , 495—497 ; cf. B., 1934, 497).—A microscopical examination is made, in some cases after suitable pre- treatment : of oils the approx. n of which may be determined by an immersion method ; of fats ; of un- saponifiable matter from fat in which cholesterol and/or phytosterol may be detected ; of essential oils for their identification; of lubricating oils for carbonaceous specks, flakes of paraffin, and for adulteration of linseed with paraffin o il; of beeswax etc. for adulteration ; of gum and resins (the origin of various copals may be determined); of shellac for red clay, sand, and woody •material; and of asphalt, bitumen, and pitch for indications of character and origin. D. K. M.

Effect of hardness on use of [boiler] feed-water.K. Weiss (Zellstoff u. Papier, 1935, 15, 11—13).—The 23° total hardness of raw H 20 for boiler-feed purposes was reduced to 3° by the Ca0-Na2C03 process and finally to 0-1° by H3P 0 4. Thus the P 0 4" ' and Na‘ could be independently controlled. Conditions of foaming are briefly discussed. D. A. C.

[Uses of the] Zeiss photometer. P. B ilham (Chem. & Ind., 1934, 1072—1074).—Uses for determination of cystine, routine testing of sugar syrups, measuring colour and clarity of gelatin and jam, and measurement of gloss are described. C. W. G.

Boiler fuel—See II. Ag equipment.—See X. Spray-drying chem icals.—See XVI.

P atents.Rotary kilns or furnaces. Allis-C halmers

Manotg. Co., Assees. of R. C. Newhouse (B.P. 420,646,5.4.34. U.S., 10.4.33).—In a ro ta ry k iln for w et m aterial (e.g., cem ent slurry, 5) w hich is provided w ith in te rnal chains ( O ) or other m eans of increasing the drying surface, the over-heating of C a t the end of the drying or beginning of th e clinkering zone is prevented by in jecting a po rtion of S a t th a t po in t an d in a direction concurrent to th e gases, th e m ain p a r t o f S flowing countercurren t th roughout. To effect th e in jection it is convenient, b u t n o t necessary, to divide th e k iln in to tw o p a rts w ith a s ta tio n a ry flue an d elevator between them . B. M. V.

Heat-interchanging apparatus for heating or cooling air, gases, or other fluids. S. J. H olmesand R. F. J arrett (Br it . U nit H eater Co.) (B.P.421,062, 13.6.33).—The apparatus is composed of flattened tubes provided with both longitudinal fins and radial gills. B. M. V.

Apparatus for grinding material in a more or less viscid condition. A. Sonsthagen (B.P. 421,173,17.3.33).—One member (M ) of a grinding mill, disc or roller, is arranged to be distorted by hydraulic pressure. This enables the mutual setting of the two grinding members to remain true no matter how the rigid member becomes altered in section due to wear. M may be made in sections to facilitate setting. A. We.

Apparatus for classifying or separating solid particles. S. E . T. E wing and J. L. W illey (B.P. 420,768, 23.10.33. South Afr., 3.11.32).—Concn. or the like is effected by wet treatment on a table the bed of which is formed of a loose (but not free) flexible sheet (S ) which is supported in wavy form on rollers which move longitudinally while S remains in the same place as a whole. M. V.

* The rem ainder of th is se t o f A bstracts will appear in nex t iveek’s issue.a

B ritish C hem ica l A b s tr a c ts—B .

130 C l . I I . — F u e l ; G a s ; T a b ; M i n e r a l O i l s .

Separation of solids from solution by evapor­ation. Be it . Celanese, L td . (B.P. 421,137, 27.9.33. U.S., 27.9.32).—Claim is made for the production of anhyd. salts by evaporation and continuous filtration with return of filtrate to the same or delivery to another evaporator, all processes being effected a t temp. the crit., viz., > 40° in the case of NaOAc. B. M. V.

Controlling processes of evaporation or crys­tallisation. D. T e a t in i (B.P. 420,831, 8.6.33. Belg., 9.6.32 and 2.5.33).—In, e.g., the evaporation of sugar solutions, a chart records simultaneously the temp. (T) of the solution (at tlie actual vac. used) and the temp. (t) of boiling of pure solvent a t the same vac. To avoid the continual addition of fresh solvent (HgO) t is measured, not by a thermometer, but by a float on a specially formed Hg barometric column. To the pointer recording t is fixed a chart showing the re­lation between T —t, purity of solution (P), and super­saturation factor, so that the optimum conditions are easily selected, P being known approx. from the history of the solution. B. M. V.

Jacketed vessels, particularly steam-jacketed boiling pans. Ashmore, Benson, P ease & Co., L td ., X. E. R ambusii, and P. A. Andrew s (B.P. 420,961,6.6.34).—A method of joining the inner and outer shells of a jacketed vessel by welding tubular stays to the out­side of both shells is described, the stay piercing the outer

.shell. A. W e .H eating retort furnaces—See II. Treating

im m iscible liquids.—See III.

II.— F U E L ; G A S ; T A R ; MINERAL OILS.Rational analysis of Polish coal by R. V.

Wheeler’s method. M. Chorąży (Przemysł Chem., 1934, 18, 34S—354).—The results of the application of Wheeler’s method (B., 1927, 401) to Dąbrowa and Upper Silesian coals are described. R. T,

Adsorptive properties of coals. H . Starczewska (Przemyśl Chem., 1934, 18, 556—560).—The adsorptive capacity (I) for methylene-bluę varies inversely with the degree of coalification, being greatest for non-caking, gas- flaming coals. The (I) of petrographic varieties are characteristic of the given coal from which they had been separated. The ratio of the (I) of a given coal to that of the coke obtained from it is 1 for coals of a high degree of coalification, and > 1 for most other coals.

R, T.Characteristics of caking and non-caking coals.

M. Chorąży (Przemysł Chem., 1934, 18, 354—360).— Coking coals (I) heated at 150—550° exhibit depoly­merisation of bitumens, which attains max. intensity at the temp. (400—450°) at which products are obtained of min. adsorptive capacity (II) for methylene-blue, and of max. absorptive capacity (III) for C5H5N vapour. The (II) and (III) curves of non-caking coals and of (I) extracted with C5H5N are of the same type, and are characterised by a relatively inconsiderable fall in (II) and an unbroken fall in (III) with rise in the temp, at which the coal had been preheated. R. T>

Physico-chem ical analysis of the process of cok­ing. W. Swientosławski (Przemysł Chem., 1934, 18,

560—571).—Coking coals differ from non-coking coals chiefly in that the former swell, whilst the latter shrink during coking. The production of coke of low mechanical strength, and possessing cracks and fissures, is ascribed to internal strains arising as a result of shrinkage, and not to the disruptive action of the gases produced.

R. T.Production of sem i-coke and coke from non­

caking coal. I. W. Sw ientosławski and M. Chorąży (Przemysł Chem., 1934,18, 579—589).—The mechanical properties of coke from briquettes (I) made from non­caking coals and pitch have been studied with reference to the temp, and pressure of briquetting, to the relative proportions of the constituents, and to the type of coal taken. The permeability to gases, combustibility, re­activity, and mechanical strength of coked (I) prepared under appropriate conditions may be that of Ruhrbasin cokes. Raising the pressure to 150 atm. haslittle effect on the mechanical strength of the cokes.

R. T.Semi-coking of coal in a laboratory continuous-

action rotary oven. II. N arioewicz (Przemysł Chem. 1934, 18 , 489—509).—A detailed study indicates that max. yields of ta r are obtained when a certain optimum load for a given oven is taken, and a t a max. velocity of de-gassing. Analytical data are given for the ta r and gas obtained under various conditions of semi-coking.

R. T.Slags from slag-tap furnaces and their proper­

ties. P. N icholls and W. T. R eid (Fuel, 1934, 13, 333—342, 371—378; ci B., 1932, 1110).—The flow temp, of slags containing about 40% of Fe20 3 fell slowly with reduction of Fe111 to Fe11 until about 50% of the oxide had been reduced, and thereafter more rapidly. Slags containing less Fe203 showed a slower rate of fall of flow temp, below 50% reduction; those with about 10% of Fe20 3 showed a min. flow temp, at about 30% of Fem . With increasing CaO at const. Fe content the influence of the state of the Fe became less for low Fe contents (10%), but was not affected for high Fe contents (40%). The effect of various changes in composition on the flow temp, is shown diagrammatic- ally. Analyses of samples of coal, slag, and fly ash from a no. of stations operating slag-tap furnaces are tabulated. Comparison of the results shows that, owing presumably to difficulties in sampling, the samples of slag and fly ash do not correspond to those of the coal. The results of experiments on the disposal of the fly ash by returning it to the slag bed are discussed.

A. B. M.Coke formation. XII. Coking properties of

durain. R. A. Mott (Fuel, 1934,13, 356—365 ; cf. B., 1934, 178).—Durain (D) can yield a commercial “ coke ” when coked in lumps ; in bituminous coals of the lowest rank the coke made from D is better than that made from the bright coal. D, however, rarely swells suffic­iently to enclose all the free space when a charge of loose particles is carbonised, and a poorly agglomerated coke of pebbly structure may be produced. In certain D samples of moderately high rank, a very fast rate of heating causes sufficient swelling to give complete agglo­meration. In D of low rank fine grinding enables a more firmly agglomerated coke to be made from a charge of

B ritish C hem ica l A b s tr a c ts— B .C l . II .— F u e l ; G a s ; T a r ; M i n e r a l O i l s . 131

loose particles. Blending with bright coal from the same seam is also effective in causing good agglomeration. A coking slack consisting of 70% of bright coal and 30% of hards can be used to make a satisfactory coke in coke ovens even when the bright coal is of relatively low rank (C < 83%); it is important, however, that the D should be well mixed with the bright coal and that the slack should be finely crushed to avoid an undue concn. of D in the coarser sizes and its segregation in one part of the oven. A. B, M.

Permeability of metallurgical coke as a charac­teristic property. W. Swientoseawski and M. Chorąży (Przemyśl Chem., 1934, 18 , 574—579).—The perme­ability (P = no. of c.c. of N2 passing per min. through 1 cm.2 of coke under a pressure gradient of 1 mm. Hg) of coke from French coking coal (I) is 243 and 932, from Westphalian (I) 90 and 496, and from Silesian caking gas coal 10-7 and 42-7, respectively, for samples taken from the centre of the oven and from the vicinity of the walls. The P of coke from non-caking coal and pitch briquettes is 310, from peat semi-coke and pitch briquettes 10, from peat briquettes 70, from unpressed peat 1442, and for alder charcoal 550. R. T.

Total quantity of vapours and gases evolved during the thermal decomposition of coal, and of its petrographic varieties. W. Swientosławski and H. B rzustowska (Przemyśl Chem., 1934, 18, 571—574). —The evolution of gases and vapours from coals of a low content of volatile constituents (I) (^> 20%) proceeds at a const, velocity from 370° to 440°, above which it pro­ceeds a t a rate tem p.; the length of the period of const, evolution diminishes with increasing (I), and is zero for gas-flaming coals. The vol. of gaseous products evolved from petrographic varieties diminishes in the order vitrain durain fusain. R. T.

Oil distillation from coal. Cannock wet-charge system . A non. (Fuel Econ., 1934, 10, 571—574).—A 50 : 50 mixture of pulverised coal and oil, the latter con­sisting of a mixture of heavy oil from the process and high-temp. creosote, is carbonised in slightly-inclined rotary steel retorts (50 ft. long ; 5 ft. diam.) which are externally heated by means of the gas produced in the process, supplemented if necessary by other oil or other gas (cf. B.P. 393,601—2 ; B., 1933, 738). The temp, of operation is approx. 450°. A blend of coals, e.g., 40% of coking coal and 60% of non-coking coal, is generally most suitable for the process. About 15 gals, of motor spirit and 4-5 gals, of heavy oil are produced per ton of mixture charged, and 15 cwt. of coke per ton of coal charged. The heavy oil is used for admixture with a further charge of coal. During a week’s test on one retort the throughput was 24 • 6 tons /day ; this was in­creased to 37 tons/day in a subsequent 3 days’ run. The coke is screened ; the larger sizes are suitable as a domestic fuel, the larger fines as a forge fuel, whilst the smaller material is briquetted, with tar as a binder, into ovoids which are also suitable for domestic purposes.

A. B. M.Heating of bright and dull coals with dilute

alkali solutions under pressure. K. D rees andG. K owalski (Brennstoff-Chem., 1934, 15, 449—451),— The following products were obtained by heating a

bright coal with Ar-NaOH at 350° in N2 (max. pressure 160 a tm .): 71% of insol. residue [A), 14% of a browh oil (B ) with an ester-like odour, obtained by extracting the liquid reaction product with E t20, and 14-3% of ft brown oil (0 ) containing aromatic and aliphatic acids, obtained by acidifying and extracting with E t2Q after the extraction of B. The yield of B -f G was higher from the bright than from the dull portion of the seam, especially at temp. < that a t which the spores decom­pose. B and C were derived principally from the huniins of the coal. 8 • 5% of tar was produced on carbonising A ; the coke formed was spontaneously inflammable.

A. B. M.Coal bitumen. II . Determination of the actual

bitumen content of coal. Extractions with benzene, xylene, and dioxan. D. J. W. K r e u l e n (Chem. Weekblad, 1934, 31, 663—666).—In the determination of the bitumen content, coal is extracted with C6H 6 (I), xylene (II), or dioxan (III) under pressure a t 275°, the extract being flocculated with E t20 and finally distilled (cf. B., 1935, 53). (II) is recommended as a more satis­factory extraction medium than (I). (Ill) is also very suitable ; it has a high y, is easily removed from the extract, as distinct from tetralin or C5II5N, and may be used for extractions a t ordinary pressures. Less oil bitumen is obtained from oxidised than from unoxidised coals, and in each case the ratio of disperse phase to extract increases in successive extractions. The p-t curve is given for (III) and the method of purification employed by Eigenberger (A., 1930,820) is recommended.

S. C.Removal of tar or pitch from glass apparatus.

J. G. Mitchell (Chem. & Ind., 1935, 16).—The appar­atus is immersed in a warm 2% solution of ordinary yellow soap. J. S. A.

Latent heat of evaporation of crude-oil fractions obtained in a single evaporation. S. N. Obryad- chikov and E. Smidovich (Neft. Choz., 1933, 25, No. 9, 24—25).—Vais, are calc, as functions of the true b.p. Experimental vals. give the latent heat of evaporation of a wide fraction. Ch . Ab s .

Cracking the condensate from the W inkler- Koch unit in comparison with cracking straight- run distillate. E. F. K orovatzki (Neft. Choz., 1933, 25, 95—98).—The yield of cracked gasoline in a once- through operation may be raised to 20% by raising the coil temp, from 490° to 495°. Ch. Ab s .

Efficiency of cracking in the high-pressure coil of the Winkler-Koch cracking unit. E. F. K oro­vatzki and Z. F . F rolova (Neft. Choz., 1933, 25, 155—158).—Results are reported and tabulated.

Ch . Ab s .Cracking of distillates from coking stills.

P . T arasov, L. A. Aleksandrov, and N. V. P opova (Neft. Choz., 1933, 25, 100—102).—The highest yields of gasoline were obtained from the fraction of b.p. < 350°. Ch . A bs.

Gas solutions as a new type of selective solvent for petroleum products. M. G o d l e wicz and S. P i ł a t (Przemysł Chem., 1934, 18, 376—385).—Asphalts are pptd. from petroleum by saturation with commercialC3H8 under pressure, and the resultant solution is

a 2

B ritish C hem ica l A b s tr a c ts—B .

*32 Cl. II .—F u e l ; Gas ; Tab ; M i n e r a l O ils.

saturated with CH4 under 50 atm. pressure, when complete separation from coloured impurities is achieved. The resultant oil is fractionated by varying the [CH4] (up to 100 atm.) in the liquid phase, on the principle that solubility of CH4 diminishes with increasing mol. wt. of the fractions, and with their degree of unsaturation. The cold-fractionated lubricating oils so obtained aTe more transparent and less coloured than are those obtained by the ordinary distillation and acid treatment, and have a better 7] index. R. T.

Condensed gases obtained from petroleum in Germany and their application in the gas industry.J. B ra n d (Gas- u. Wasserfach, 1934, 77, 861—867).— A survey is given of the sources and methods of separ­ating condensed gases (I) (i.e., C3H8 and C4H10) both from crude petroleum and from cracking processes. 8—9 X 10® kg. of (I) are available per annum, = 24—28 X 10G cu. m. of coal gas (II). Special distribution and storage arrangements are required, but (I) possess a no. of advantages over (II). C. C.

Activation of crude fuller’s earth. 0 . E ckart (Angew. Chem., 1934, 47, 821—822).—Activation of fuller’s earth (for oil bleaching) by acid treatment cannot completely be explained by the liberation of exchange­able bases and the formation of clay acids. The process involves the dissolution of A120 3 and an increase in the total surface area of the material. A. G. P.

New type of silica gel for oil regeneration. M. V.K urlin (J. Appl. Chem. Russ., 1934, 7 , 825—830).— Si02 gel (I) obtained as a waste product in A1 factories is little less active as an adsorbent than is specially prepared (I), and may be used in its place for the regeneration of aged mineral oils. R. T.

Neutral products of oxidation of petroleum hydrocarbons by atmospheric oxygen. S. S.N ametkin and V. K. Zvorikina (J. Gen. Chem. Russ., 1934, 4, 906—914).—7-7% of the alcohol-aldehyde fraction of the products of oxidation of paraffin by atm. 0 2 cons'ists of aldehydes of b.p. > 100%, amongst which «-C5_ 9H11_ 17-CHO were identified. The alcohols ?i-C6_i12Hi3_25 ■OH were identified in the residue after separation of aldehydes. R. T.

Mineral oil sulphonic acids. II I . Analysis of their m ixtures with naphthenic acids and mineral oil. S. von P ilat and J. Sereda (Fettchem. Umschau, 1934, 41, 171—174, 200—204, 237—241; cf. B„ 1933, 211 ; 1934, 612).—The behaviour of naphthenic (N) and mineral oil sulphonic (“ naphtkenesulphonic ”) acids (S) towards E t20, light petroleum, and aq. solutions of acids and salts has been studied in order to evolve a scheme of analysis of mixtures such as acid sludge,“ Kontakt,” etc. N do not react with Na2S04, CaCl2, or NaCl a t room temp., but, in the case of S, salts are formed by double decomp., mineral acid being liberated ; a t higher temp. N liberate acid from chlorides but not from Xa2SO,}. Further [3- and 8-sulphonic acids may be partly hydrolysed by the action of warm mineral acids, so that Schaefer’s method of analysis (B., 1931, 727) appears to be unreliable. In the suggested scheme of analysis, which is described in detail with typical examples, free mineral oil (M) is removed from the

dil. aq. solution of the neutralised mixed acids by extraction with E t20 ; N and S are then recovered (as acids) from their salts by acidification and are treated with saturated aq. NaCl, which converts S alone into- their H20-sol. Na salts, from which the free N may be separated by extraction with light petroleum. M, N r and S can so be determined with an accuracy of ¿ 0 -2, —0-5, and —1-0 (% on original mixture), respectively. H ,0 can be determined by the xylene-distillation method and free H 2S04 as BaS04 after washing it out of the E t20 solution of the mixture with dii. IIC1. E. L.

Natural gas as boiler fuel. R. Orel (Przemysł Chem., 1934, 18, 510—519).—Analytical data are given for the gases obtained by burning CII4 a t different temp, with different air supplies. The results obtained are applied to the problem of utilising natural gas as boiler fuel, and a boiler adapted to this fuel is described.

R. T.Natural gases. IV. Fractionation of the low-

b.p. hydrocarbons of liquefied natural gas. K.K ling and B. W ięcka wek (Przemyśl Chem., 1934, 18, 424—433 ; cf. A., 1932,1106).—Apparatus and methods serving for the fractionation of liquefied Borysław natural gas are described. C2H6, C3H8> n- and wo-C4H10 have been isolated, and their b.p., v.p., and d compared with those found for the corresponding products of American origin. R. T.

Synthesis of liquid hydrocarbons from water- gas. K. Muszkat (Przemysł Chem., 1934, 18, 483— 489).—The most active catalyst, consisting of 4 :1 N i-Si02, loses 80% of its activity after 50 hr., whilst 9 :1 Ni-BaO, Ni-ThOa, and Ni-Al20 3 are practically as activc as at the beginning. Coating of the catalyst surfaces with the hydrocarbons produced does not affect its activity. All catalysts examined are instantly inactivated by 0 2 in the reaction mixture. R. T.

Synthesis of benzine from carbon monoxide and hydrogen under ordinary pressures. XX. Com­position of the reacting gas m ixture. II . F . F u j i- itora and S. T suneoka. XXI. Relation between gas composition and working temperature or degree of saturation of the benzine. XX II. Serviceability of new alloy catalysts. S. T suneoka (Sci. Papers Inst. Phys. Chem. Res., Tokyo, 1934, 25, 127—136, 137—143,144—151; cf. B., 1934, 662).—XX. 10% or 20% of N2, CH4, and C02 in the reacting gases, which contain CO and H2 in the ratio 1 : 2 approx., does not greatly lower the yield of benzine (I), using the catalyst Ni + 15% Mn + 3% T h02 + 125% kieselguhr, but with 40% there is a marked decrease in yield. In general, the influence of C02 is > that of N , and CH4. With increasing concn. of diluent the product becomes more volatile and contains less illuminating oil. Using industrial gas (II), containing 81% of useful material, and the same catalyst, a yield of 98 c.c. of (I) per cu. m. of gas has been obtained. The removal of S compounds from (II) is described.

XXI. With a reacting CO-H2 mixture of C0/H 2 ratio approx. J, lowering the reaction temp, from 200° accelerates the formation of (I) on a catalyst containing Ni + 15% Mn -f 3% A120 3 -f 125% kiesel­guhr. There is no formation of CH4 if the temp, is

B ritish C hem ica l A b s tr a c ts—B .C l . I I . — F u e l ; G a s ; T a r ; M i n e r a l O i l s .

200—210°. With concns. of H2 > C 0/II2 = formation of CH4 can be suppressed and the yield of(I) increased by lowering the temp. The I val. of the product varies linearly with the H 2 content of the reacting mixture, and the volatility increases as the reaction temp, is raised.

XXII. Synthesis of (I) has been studied with Raney’s catalyst, prepared by removing the Si from the alloy Ni-Co-Si ( 1 :1 : 2) by NaOII. On raising the reaction temp, the volatility and I val. of the product increases. With increasing quantities of catalyst the yield of (I) increases and the most favourable temp, decreases. CH4 is formed at higher temp. The advantages of the catalyst are : small vol. and hence high gas velocity, high conductivity (use at lower temp.), simple prep, and regeneration (fusing with Si). R- S. B.

Catalytic aromatisation of Novo-Bogatinsk [Emba] benzine. N. D. Zelinski and N. I. Schotkin (J. Gen. Chern. Russ., 1934,4,901—905).—The aromatic hydrocarbon content is raised by passing the benzine over C-Pt or Al30 3-Ni catalyst a t 300°. R. T.

Composition of Polish gasolines. Z. Ł achociński and Z. Tomasik (Przemyśl Chem., 1934,1 8 ,473—478).— The composition of 18 samples is given. R. T.

Separation of normal methane hydrocarbons from straight-run gasolines. R. A. Virobyantz and S. M. Gabrielyantz (Neft. Choz., 1933,25,158—159).— The refining of appropriate fractions with H2S04 and C1S0 3H is described. Ch. Abs.

Solubility of water in and the boiling ranges of kerosene-alcohol m ixtures. F . Spausta (Petroleum, 1934, 30, No. 50, 1—3).—The II20 solubility (S) in EtOH (I)-kerosene mixtures (II) increases with the proportion of (I) and is higher at 20° than at 0°, but S is lower than in (I)-gasoline or (I)-benzol blends. Certain constituents of gasoline form azeotropic mixtures with (I), but these do not occur with kerosene, so that on distillation almost all (I) distils over a t < 80°. The end­point of (II) falls as the proportion of (I) increases.

C. C.Detonation and pseudodetonation in internal-

combustion engines. M. Sf.rruys (Compt. rend., 1934,199, 830—833 ; cf. B., 1933, 293).—The change in the character of the combustion with advance of the ignition, for engine temp, of 40—80°, is discussed.

J. W. S.Combustion processes in [intemal-combustion]

engines. M. B rutzkus (Compt. rend., 1934, 199, 833—834).—To provide means of sampling the gaseous contents of an intemal-combustion engine at any instant during the reaction process, the outlet valve is Controlled by a cam, so as to allow a sample of the gases present at any predetermined moment to escape.

New reagents in the petroleum industry. Naphthalene as a de-waxing agent, and cresol as a selective solvent. E. K atz (Przemyśl Chem., 1934, 18,408—419).—C10HS is dissolved in the warm petroleum(I) diluted with solvent naphtha (II); on cooling, C10H8 crystallises out to yield a readily filterable mass retaining the wax separating out. De-waxing can also be effected by diluting the (I) with cresol in place of (II), cooling,

and separating the two liquid layers formed, when the wax is present in the upper layer only. Alternatively, E tO Ii is added to the cresol-(I) solution, when the fractions separate in order of their solubility in cresol.

R. T.Determination of colour and light-sensitivity of

paraffin wax. A. M. R abinovich and E. S. Avakova (Neft. Choz., 1933, 25, No. 10, 36—37).—The wax is melted at 60—70°, freed from air in a vac. desiccator, cooled, and examined in a Stammer colorimeter.

Ch . Abs.Light-sensitivity of paraffin wax. V. I. Shile

and E. S. Avakova (Neft. Choz., 1933,25, No. 9,59—60). —Paraffin (I) containing > 0 : 1% of oil is unstable towards ultra-violet light. (I) treated with fuller s earth and exposed to ultra-violet light becomes stable to. light. Ch . Ab s .

Theory of the process of sweating of paraffin wax. J. H ausman (Przemyśl Chem., 1934, 18, 401— 408).—The sweating of paraffin wax (I) is irrational, as the liquefied portion consists of a mixture of high- and low-m.p. hydrocarbons; better results are given by fractional crystallisation of fused (I), with filtration at the temp, of crystallisation. R- T.

Refining of paraffin by means of ferric sulphate. Z. Z. B iluchowski and R . D obrowolski (Przemyśl Chem., 1934, 18, 309—313).—Fe2(S04)3 (I) (2-8%) is heated a t 135—138° for 3 hr. with paraffin, m.p. 50— 52°, the oil filtered and treated with infusorial earth(II) (2-3%) and Na2C03 (III) (0-3%), and again with(I) (0-9%), (II) (1-4%), and (III) (0-5%), when a colourless, odourless product is obtained. The paraffin in the spent (I) can partly be regenerated, leaving a mixture of (I), org. compounds (containing 3-42% S), FeS04, Fe20 3, and FeS. The above method presents many advantages over the usual H 2S04 method. ^

Refining of lubricating oils by selective extrac­tion. H. B urstix (Przemysł Chem., 1934, 18, 341— 347).—The oil is shaken with an equal vol. of cresol (I), when the upper, light-coloured layer contains paraffin hydrocarbons (II), whilst naphthcnes, asphalt, and cresol arc conc. in the lower layer. (I) is quantitatively regenerated by steam-distillation. Asphalt is separated from (II) by extraction with (I), which dissolves chiefly resins, asphaltenes, and S compounds; the asphalt obtained after distilling off the (I) has > 25% of its original (II) content. R- T.

Refining lubricating oils with liquid sulphur dioxide by the Edeleanu method. N. A. Alekseev (Neft. Choz., 1933,2 5 ,165—171).

Extinction coefficients of mineral lubricating oils. R . K oetschau (Brennstoff-Chem., 1934, 15, 44,1—449).—The use of the Pulfrich photometer in the examination of mineral lubricating oils is illustrated by curves showing the extinction coeff. (A), or log K, as a function of the X of the light used, for oils of different origin and oils that have been variously treated. The effect of bleaching by means of fuller’s earth, the changes occurring on artificial “ ageing ” (heating for 48—144 hr. a t 120°) or on use in the engine, the effect of extraction of used oils with PhN 02, etc. can be shown quantitatively

a 3

B ritish C hem ica l A b s tr a c ts—B .

134 C l . II.— F u e l ; G a s ; T a b ; M i n e r a l O i l s .

by such methods. Solutions in CGII0 of hard asphalt from a cylinder oil gave a series of parallel log K curves ; similar curves were obtained with an oil which was “ aged ” in presence of Cu for different periods, whence it is concluded that the change on ageing was due to increasing concn. of asphalt in the oil unaccompanied by any fundamental structural changes. The method can be used to distinguish between stable and unstable motor spirits by determining K for violet light. Other applications are discussed. A. B. M.

Oxidation of transformer oils. M. V. K urlin and A. M. B linova (J. Appl. Chem. Russ, 1934, 7, 831—836).—The deterioration of the oil proceeds parallel with 0 2 absorption from the air ; this takes place more rapidly, and to a greater extent, for highly refined than for ordinary transformer oil. R. T.

Microscopy [of oils etc.].—See I. Cutting fluids for m etals . Cracked gases for welding etc.—See X. C electrodes.—See XI. Hydro-cracking of oils etc.—See XII. Weathering of bituminous coat­ings.—See X III. Huminic fertilisers. Coal ash as manure. Petroleum oils [as sprays].—See XVI.

P atents.Carbonisation of coal briquettes. E. B. A.

Zwoyer and A. L. Stillman, Assrs. to Gen . F uel B riquette Corp . (U.S.P. 1,950,017, 6.3.34. Appl.,11.8.31).—Finely-ground anthracite is briquetted with a suitable binder and the briquettes, spread out in a single layer on a conveyor, are passed through a heating chamber wherein they are subjected to combustion gases at about 1000°. They remain in this chamber only for sufficient time, e.g., 2—5 min., to become surface-hardened. They are then passed, together with the combustion gases, through a slowly rotating, inclined, cylindrical retort, wherein carbonisation is completed by the sensible heat of the gases. The briquettes are cooled by being mixed with moist coal fines, from which they are subsequently separated by screening. The dried fines are then further heated by the waste gases of the process and passed to the mixer and thence to the briquetting press. A. B. M.

Heating of retort furnaces and coke ovens.Comp. Gen . de Construction de F ours (B.P. 420,689,12.6.33. F r., 11.6.32).—In a se tting of ta ll re to rts heated by com bustion gases passing up one side and down the o ther (reversibly) in flues (F ), a ir is supplied a t several different levels to F from sm aller passages having ad justab le transfe r ports and th e cross-passages between F a t th e to p arc placed in th e brickwork between the d istilla tion cham bers so th a t the la tte r m ay be of full w id th th roughout. B. M. V.

Destructive hydrogenation of carbonaceous materials. L. von Szeszich (U.S.P. 1,950,333, 6.3.34. Appl, 11.2.31. Ger, 19.2.30. Cf. U.S.P. 1,948,058; B , 1935, 9).—The materials are hydrogenated in presence of H2S and a Mo or W catalyst. The products are subjected to a partial reduction in pressure, e.g., from 200 to 50 atm., the gas thereon evolved consisting principally of H 2 and containing only relatively small amounts of hydrocarbons and H2S. The liquid products are then further reduced to atm. pressure whereon a

further quantity of gas is released. The H„S is separated from this gas, e.g., by washing with l i 20 under pressure, and sufficient of it is added to the first- gas to give the desired catalytic activity, the resultant gas mixture, together with the requisite quantity of fresh H2, being then recirculated. A. B. M.

Manufacture of carburetted water-gas. G. ,T.N o r d m e y e r , Assr. to K o p p e r s Co. or D e l a w a r e (U.S.P. 1,949,728, 6.3.34. Appl., 16.5.31).—The plant comprises a generator (A) of substantially twice the normal height, the fuel bed (B ) of which occupies only the lower half, and a superheater (C) etc. The following cycle of operations is carried o u t: (a) B is air-blasted and the blast gases are burned with secondary air in C ; (b) a reverse air blast is passed up through G, down through A and the upper portion of B, when the gases are withdrawn circumferentially and passed to atm. or a waste-heat boiler; (c) steam is passed up through B, heavy oil being simultaneously sprayed into the upper part of A, and the resultant gases are passed through O ; (d) steam is passed up through O and down through A and B ; (e) steam is again passed up through B ; ( /) water-gas remaining in the plant is removed by a short air-purge. Coke deposited in A, in the upper part of B, and in G, during (c), is removed again during (b).

A. B. M.Production of mixed oil gas and water-gas.

H. G. T e r z i a n , Assr. to U n i t e d Gas I m p r o v e m e n t Co. (U.S.P. 1,949,819, 6.3.34. Appl:, 11.7.29).— The fuel bed (A) in a generator is air-blasted and the blast gases are burned with secondary air in two heat-storage chambers (B , C). Oil is introduced into B, is cracked in B and O, and the oil gas, after condensation of the tar and light oil, is passed up and/or down through A, and thence to storage. The process is repeated, the oil, however, being introduced into C and the products passed through O and B in the reverse direction to that of the preceding operation. Water-gas is produced in the plant in the usual manner and is mixed with the oil gas produced as above. A. B. M.

Use of heavy oil in the manufacture of carburet­ted water-gas. J . A. P e r ry -, Assr. to U n ite d Gas Im provem ent Co. (U.S.P. 1,949,811, 6.3.34. Appl.,27.7.29).— The generator (A) and carbu re tto r (B) of th e p la n t are bo th provided w ith fuel beds (F), which are blasted sim ultaneously, th e b last gases from A being passed th rough B and thence, together w ith the gases from B, th rough th e superheater (C). S team is th en passed th rough the F in A, the w ater-gas produced is carbure tted in B by introducing heavy oil therein to , an d th e carburetted gas is “ fixed ” by passing i t th roughC . In th is step th e gas is passed dow nw ardly th rough B, b u t n o t th rough the F th e re in ; the coke formed, however, is deposited on th e F and is gasified during a subsequent “ blow ” period. B m ay be provided w ith a vertical p artitio n , ending ju s t above th e F, the gases passing down one side and up the o ther side thereof, and oil being introduced in to th e gas during its dow n­w ard passage. A. B. M.

Manufacture of combustible gas. J. A. P e r r y and W. H. F u l w e i l e r , Assrs. to U n i t e d G a s I m p r o v e ­m e n t Co. (U.S.P. 1,949,810, 6.3.34. Appl., 6.5.29).—

B ritish C h em ica l A b s tr a c ts—B .C l . II .—-Fu e l ; G a s ; T a b ; M i n e r a l O i l s . 135

A portion of tlie CO is separated from blue water-gas, e.g., by liquefaction or by absorption in an aq. ammoniacal Cu solution, and the residual gas is con­verted into CH4 + II20, e.g., by passing it over a Ni catalyst at a suitable temp. The separated CO is recovered and is passed, mixed with steam, over an activated Fe oxide catalyst, whereby it is converted into I i2 + C02. The C02 is removed, e.g., by scrubbing with H 20, and the H2 is added to the CH4 produced as above. A. B. M.

[Aqueous] dispersion of asphalt. A. E. Schutte, Assr. to L ane Construction Corp. (U.S.P. 1,950,272,6.3.34. Appl, 30.10.33).—Asphalt is dispersed in an aq. extract of the hulls of linseed or flaxseed, which contains the mucilaginous component of the hulls but is freed from the oily and mealy constituents before use.

A. B.M.Development of volatiles from hydrocarbon

substances. L. J. W alsh (U.S.P. 1,955,264, 17.4.34. Appl, 5.5.26).—The light hydrocarbons are removed from petroleum oil by distillation and in the case of asphaltic oils the asphalt also is separated by distillation. The oil is then subjected to 2 or 3 cracking operations in series, the light hydrocarbon vapours (10—15% of the oil) produced in each operation being removed before the next cracking. The pressure on the units decreases as the series is traversed. D. K. M.

Catalytic hydrogenation of hydrocarbon oil and the like. R. P. R ussell and W. C. Asbury, Assrs. to Standard- I . G. Co. (U.S.P. 1,949,630, 6.3.34. Appl,25.6.29).—The oil, mixed with H 2 under pressure, is preheated and passed through two (or more) vertical reaction vessels in succession, wherein it is subjected to the action of a catalyst (oxides of Cr, Mo, etc.) main­tained in suspension in the liquid. The ingoing material enters a t the lower part of each vessel. The liquid product leaves through a const.-level outlet pipe, that leaving the last vessel being then recirculated. The vaporised products leave through outlets in the top of each vessel and pass to a condensing system. The liquid in the vessels is given an upward velocity of flow sufficient to prevent the suspended catalyst from settling. A. B. M.

Destructive hydrogenation of heavy hydrocarbon oils. E. B. P eck , C. E. K leiber , and F. M. Archibald. Assrs. to Standard- I . G. Co. (U.S.P. 1,955,862, 24.4.34, Appl, 13.11.29).—Unrefined heavy hydrocarbon oil (I) is treated in liquid phase below the flash point of the oil with an adsorptive agent, e.g., fuller’s earth, S i0 2 gel, to remove suspended material and impurities of a gummy or resinous nature, which partly inhibit hydro­genation. (I) may be dissolved in a suitable solvent, e.g., naphtha, the latter being recovered by steam- distillation. The treated product is then hydrogenated in presence of a solid catalyst which remains active in presence of S or compounds of S. C. C.

Treatment of heavy hydrocarbons. E . Mo e h r l e (U.S.P. 1,954,573, 10.4.34. Appl, 3.4.31.. Ger, 7.6.30). —The hydrocarbons are treated with 1% of I or of acompound liberating this amount of I a t 350—550° /> 50 atm. The H 2 and other gases resulting from the cracking are brought into contact a t the moment of

their production with the larger cracked particles to produce gas, benzine, and higher-boiling polymerisation products suitable for use as lubricating oils. C. L. G.

Production of hydrocarbon oils from solid carbonaceous material. J . M. J ennings, Assr. to Standard- I . G. Co. (U.S.P. 1,950,309, 6.3.34. Appl,23.6.30).—Coal, ground to a state of substantially colloidal fineness, is suspended in a heavy oil, and the suspension, suitably preheated,-is passed with H2 under pressure (> 20 atm.) through a reaction chamber packed with lumps of catalyst of a size permitting free flow of the suspension therethrough. The reaction temp, is 360—460°. A “ sulphactive ” catalyst is used, comprising the oxides of Cr, W, and/or Mo, to which other oxides, e.g., ZnO, A120 3, may be added.

A. B. M.Treatment of fuel oil. R. E. H ayijstt, Assr. to

Union Oil Co. of California (U.S.P. 1,956,286, 24.4.34. Appl, 4.5.29).—Heavy low-grade fuel oil (I) is distilled a t its incipient cracking temp, and 25—50% of a gas-oil fraction separated. The residuum is cracked to produce up to 10% of gasoline and a cracked oil of similar characteristics to (I), but of lower d. C. C.

Treating [distillate hydrocarbon] oils. W. M. Stratford, Assr. to Texas Co. (U.S.P. 1,954,431,10.4.34. Appl, 8.12.30).—Gasolines of high anti­knock val. are obtained by hydrogenation and conversion of a hydrocarbon distillate heated at 480—650° and subjected to the action of H 2 under pressure (3000— 4000 lb. per sq. in.) in presence of an AlCl3-hydrocarbon compound catalyst (resulting from the contact of A1C13 with the distillate). The lower-boiling oils are removed from the higher-boiling reaction products and spent catalysts by distillation. C. L. G.

Treatment of hydrocarbon oils. J. F. W ait (B.P. 420,909, 2.6.33).—Hydrocarbon vapours (I) are brought in contact for brief periods (<^ 1 min.) in a series of zones under different conditions (200—500°) with molten, freshly-liberated, active light metals (II) or fused, anhyd, activated substances (III), e.g., NaOH -f-KOH activated with Na or NaNH2. (II) consist of metals having an ionisation potential about 6 volts and possessing 1 unpaired electron under the conditions of treatment, e.g., Na, K, Ca, or A1 a t high temp. (II) and (III) are produced by electrolysis and used immediately. The flow of (I) is in series countercurrent to the reagent, through towers, but the treating agent is individual to each tower and is reactivated by electrolysis or by the addition of freshly electrolysed material. C. C.

Purification of hydrocarbon oil. L. d e F lorez (U.S.P. 1,956,525, 24.4.34. Appl, 30.3.31).—The cool­ing of hydrocarbon oils (I) during treatment with reagents which cause an exothermic reaction, e.g., I I2S04, or in other treatments where temp, must be lower, is effected by maintaining sufficient vac. to effect substantial vaporisation without the addition of extraneous heat. Light hydrocarbons may be added to heavy (I) to produce the required refrigerating effect.

C. C.[Desulphurising] treatment of hydrocarbon oils.

R. E. Schaad, Assr. to U niversal Oil P roducts Co. (U.S.P. 1,954,843, 17.4.34. Appl, 1.6.31).—Cracked

B ritish C hem ica l A b s tr a c ts—B .

136 C l . I I . — F u e l ; G a s ; T a r ; M i n e r a l O i l s .

hydrocarbon distillates have their S content reduced to O-05—0-1% by treatment with a metal nitride, e.g., Ni3N2, Mg3N2, in the liquid or vapour state, e.g., by treatment with 5% Mg3N2 a t 200° in the liquid phase, or by passing the vapours and a little steam through a tower containing Fe3N2, Fe4N2, and fuller’s earth. D. K. M.

[Desulphurising] treatment of hydrocarbon oils.II. V. R ees and C. F. Teichmann, Assrs. to Texas Co. (U.S.P. 1,955,607, 17.4.34. Appl, 21.4.30).—S is removed from oils, particularly light petroleum fractions, by treatment with an alkali hydroxide or carbonate and free S, with or without an oxidising agent, e.g., Na20 2, Na2S20 8, in presence of fuller’s earth, bauxite, active C, etc. D. Iv. M.

Freeing [hydrocarbon] oils from sulphur dioxide.R. K. Stratford and W. P. D oohan, Assrs. to Standard Oil D evelopment Co. (U.S.P. 1,954,959,17.4.34. Appl,29.11.30).—Oil containing S 0 2 (resulting from treatment with H 2S04 or liquid S02) is treated at, e.g., 138—150° with aq. NaOH containing PhOH and/or its homologues and/or naphthenic acid compounds. D. K. M.

Sweetening [of hydrocarbons o ils]. G. L. R owsey (U.S.P. 1,954,103, 10.4.34. Appl, 13.3.30).—A sus­pension of preformed Pb2S in aq. caustic alkali is intimately mixed with the oil by air-blowing. The ppt. settles easily and can be re-used, being occasionally steamed to remove oily impurities. The Pb2S used may be obtained by settling the voluminous ppt. from ordinary sweetening operations. Oils containing II2S should be pretreated with aq. NaOH. C. L. G.

[Stabilising] treatment of hydrocarbon oils.(a) G. E gloff, (b) J. C. Morrell, Assrs. to Universal Oil P roducts Co. (U.S.P. 1,954,867 and 1,954,887,17.4.34. Appl, [a ] 31.10.30, [b ] 6.6.31).—(a) A heated mixture of the oil and the treating agent, e.g., aq. ZnCl2, is passed into the bottom of a fractionating tower (T) down which a solution of the agent is flowing, and in which is a lamp emitting ultra-violet rays. The vapours passing up through T on condensation yield an oil of reduced gum and S content and of increased colour- stability. (b ) The distillates are improved similarly by treating them with aq. (NH4)oS„08, with or without H 2S04. “ “ D. K. M.

Treatment of hydrocarbon oils, (a—c) J. C.Morrell and (a) G. E gloff, Assrs. to U niversal Oil P roducts Co. (U.S.P. 1,954,486—8, 10.4.34. A p p l,[ a] 3.6.31, [b , c] 6.6.31).—Hydrocarbon vapours formed during distillation or cracking are refined by treatment with (a ) HC1 in presence of (saturated) ZnCl2 solution and an earthy adsorbent, containing a solid Cujf s a lt;(b ) an aq. solution containing an alkali pyrosulphate (Na2S20 7) and H 2S04 ; (c) an aq. solution containing an alkali persulphate (Na2S20 8) and 1I2S04. Finished sweet gasolines of low S and gum content, good colour and colour-stability are produced. C. L. G.

Breaking of petroleum em ulsions. M. D e Groote and B. R eiser , Assrs. to Tretolite Co. (U.S.P. 1,954,585,10.4.34. Appl, 16.9.33).—Sulphoaryl esters of higher aliphatic or naphthenic acids, which may be modified

by addition at a double linking or acylation of OH (0-2—0-005%), are added to the emulsion. The preferred product is prepared by heating Na sulpho- benzyl ricinoleate (490 pts.) with 0-CBH4(C0 )20 (148 pts.) in xylene at 120—130°. Ii. A. P.

Stabilisation of petroleum products. J. W.Orelup (B.P. 420,371, 26.5.33. U.S., 26.5.32).—Di- naphthylene oxide or dioxide or perylene is added to motor spirit (cracked petroleum containing PbEt4 etc.) as gum inhibitor and to impart fluorescence. .

H. A. P.Refining of mineral oil and preparation of lubric­

ating oil. M. B. Miller & Co, Inc. (B.P. 421,123,9.6.33. U.S., 22.12.32).—Mineral oil is separated into naphthcnic (I) and paraffinic fractions (II) by treatment with a naphthenic solvent (III), e.g., a wood-tar acid or cresylic acid, in presence of a solvent which has greater solvent power for (II), e.g., liquefied C2H6, C3H8, C4H10, etc. The efficacy of (III) may be increased by adding a proportion of a solvent having selective action on (I) but limited solvent power for (II), preferentially dis­solving asphalt and constituents of high mol. w t, e.g., S02, furfuraldehyde, NH2Ph. Batch treatment or countercurrent flow may be used, relatively low tem p, e.g., 38—70°, being employed to promote separation into 2 layers. Oils containing wax must be treated at temp, sufficiently high to maintain the fluid state.

C. C.Dewaxing of hydrocarbon oil. M. L. L angworthy,

Assr. to Texas Co. (U.S.P. 1,956,036, 24.4.34. Appl,15.7.31).—A lubricating oil fraction containing wax is mixed with a solvent, e.g., COMe2, COMeEt, C6H0, or with mixtures of such solvents, and chilled to the point a t which wax separates. At this point a filter-aid, e.g., fuller’s earth, is added and the mixture filtered.

C. C.Treatment and examination of lubricants.

“ Y a cco” S.A.F. (B.P. 421,226, 29.11.33. Belg,30.11.32).—Lubricants (I) are subjected to mechanical treatment between 2 co-axial, truncated conical members [a rotor (II) and a fluid-tight vessel (III)] which are adjustable axially relative to each other. In general, the clearance between (II) and (III) is small, but the conditions of test, e.g., clearance, speed of rotation, tem p, pressure, and the composition of the a tm , may be varied as desired. (I) circulates in a closed circuit through the apparatus, and after a given time it is removed and the change in properties, e.g., in y), capillarity, adhesion, e tc , is determined. C. C.

Removal of m etallic soap from lubricating em ulsions. R. C. W illiams and H. W. R ussell, Assrs. to I ronsides Co. (U.S.P. 1,955,522, 17.4.34. Appl, 27.6.31).—Lubricants contaminated during wire­drawing operations with metal (Cu) soap (S ) and metallic particles (P ) are passed into a tank in which a solvent, e.g., molten paraffin wax (m.p. 66—71°), floats on the lubricant and extracts the S. The P sink to the bottom of the tank and the intermediate portion of lubricant may be re-used. D. K. M.

d e fin e s .—See III. Contact substances for oil refining.—See VII. Hydrogenation apparatus.— See X. Coating compositions.—See X III.

B ritish C h em ica l A b s tr a c ts—B .C l . I I I . — O r g a n i c I n t e r m e d i a t e s . 137

III.— ORGANIC INTERMEDIATES.Chlorination of methane. Z. T o m a sik (Przemysl

Chem, 1934, 18, 598—605).—Up to 70% of the Cl present in 2 : 9 :18 mixtures of CH4, HC1, and air is converted into Cl-products, containing 90% of CC14, by passing them over glass plates coated with CuCl2 at 400°. The effects of varying the temp., rate of flow, composition of the reaction mixture, and construction of the apparatus, and of dilution with inert gases, are described. R- T .

Examination of the suitability of stabilisers for chlorinated hydrocarbons of low m ol. w t. K. R.D ie t r ic h and W. L o h r e n g e l (Angew. Chem, 1934, 47 , 830—832).—An apparatus is described in which the Cl-compound is heated with 1I20 in presence of 0 2 at 100o/25 atm. for 4 hr. The liberated HC1 is deter­mined by Volhard’s method. Results for many stabilisers are tabulated. H. W.

Methyl, isopropyl, and am yl alcohols in ethyl alcohol. Vanillin as a reagent for their detection and approximate determination. C. L. M. B r o w n (Pharm. J , 1934, 133, 560).—The following colours are produced when alcohols containing 1% of vanillin are treated with 1—3% of conc. H2S04 : MeOH (I) pale mauve, EtOII (II) colourless to pale yellowish-green, Pr^OII (III) and C5IIn -OH (IV) Prussian-blue. By this test it is possible to detect 1% of (I), 0 -1% of(III), and 0-01% of (IV) in (II), whilst the officialB.P. (HgS04) test will detect 0-01% of (III) and (IV), but will not detect (I). S. C.

Catalytic hydrolysis of chlorobenzene by steam .D. V. T is c h t sc h e n k o and A. M. T sc h u r b a k o v (J. Appl. Chem. Russ, 1934, 7, 764—769).—PhOII is obtained in 30% yield by passing PhCl and steam over Holmes’ Si02 gel (B , 1926, 438) containing 10% of Cu a t 550°. 100% yields can be obtained by repeating the cycle with the unchanged PhCl from the first operation.

R. T.Preparation of benzenesulphonic acid. T. MazoiS-

s k i and E . S u c h a r d a (Przemysi Chem, 1934, 18, 478— 481).—The sulphonation mixture is subjected to a process of continuous extraction with C6H6 in a special apparatus, for 34 h r , when the entire PhS03H or C6HMc'S03H content is present in the C6II6 extract, leaving a residue of 81-5% H2S04, which after addition of oleum serves for the sulphonation of the next batch. Part of the C6H6 used undergoes sulphonation during the extraction. R. T.

Sulphuric acid as catalyst for the ethylation of arylamines by alcohol. N. G. L a p t e v (Anilinokras. Prom , 1934, 4, 551—554).—H2S04 can replace HC1 as a catalyst for the ethylation of NH2P h ; the ratio NPliEt2 : NIIPhEt in the product increases with increasing relative concn. of II2S04. Max. yields of NPhEt2 (60%) and NHPhEt (37 ■ 6%) are obtained by heating" 1 :3 :0 - 3 mixtures of NH2Ph, EtOH, and H 2S04 a t 210—2150/34—35 atm. for 4 hr. Cast-Fe is less corroded than is Pb apparatus. R. T.

Analysis of aminoazobenzene. K. D. S c h t s c h e r - b a t s c h e v (Anilinokras. Prom , 1934, 4, 562—563).—

4 g. of PhN2*NH2 (I) are dissolved a t > 50° in 150— 200 c.c. of 70% AcOII, the solution is titrated a t 20° with iV-NaN02, 220 c.c. of 10% HC1 are added, the titration is continued to a permanent reaction for N 02', and hence the total NII2 content can be calc. NH2Ph is determined by shaking 10 g. of (I) with 200 c.c. of 4% HC1, filtering, adding 25 c.c. of 0 -lA7-bromidc- bromate solution and 10 c.c. of conc. HC1 to 50 c.c. of filtrate, shaking, and 5 min. later adding aq. KI and titrating liberated I. R. T.

Conditions of formation of phenol by fusion of sodium benzenesulphonate with sodium hydroxide.II . R. K. Eichman, M. M. Schemjakin, and V. N. Voshdaeva (Anilinokras. Prom , 1934, 4, 523—531 ; cf. B , 1935, 91).—The yields of PhOII are unaffected by the presence of 2—10% of Na2S04 in the melt, and lowered by 2—3% in presence of NaCl; the action of NaCl is inhibited by Na2C03, so that the same yields (90%) are obtained from melts containing pure NaOH, and containing in addition 10% of Na2S04, 6% of NaCl, and 8% of Na2C03. Fe up to 1-5% reduces the yields, owing to secondary reactions between PhOH and F e ; Fe20 3 acts similarly, KC103 oxidises Na2S03 to Na2S04, but does not affect the yield of PhOH, whilst in presence of Pli2S02 (up to 3%) or ?»-C6H4(S03Na)2 low yields of PhOH are obtained, owing to form­ation of 0- and ^-C6H4Ph-OH (I). In presence of 4% of Na2S the yields fall from 90% to 76%, owing to formation of (I) and other phenolic by-products ; Na2S03 has a similar, but feebler, action (87% yields in presence of 13% of Na2S03), the by-products being (I), mi-C6H4(OH)2, and (2-C6I i4-0H)2. Addition of 15% of NaOPh reduces the yields to 86%, with formation of Ph20, and the melt from a previous operation has a similar effect. R. T.

Preparation of benzaldehyde and benzoic acid from toluene. A . M. B e r k e n g e im , E. V . J a v o r s k a ja ,0. P. A l b it z k a ja , and T. F. D a n k o v a (J. Appl. Chem. Russ, 1934, 7, 778—784).—20—22% of PliMe heated at 35—40° with 4 pts. of 65% II2S04 and 1 pt. of hydrated Mn02 (I) is converted after 6 hi. into PhCHO, and 40% is recovered as PhMe. Using 13—14 pts. of 50% H2S04 and 3 pts. of (I) per 1 pt. of PhMe, and at 70—75°, BzOH (60—70%) and PhCHO are obtained in 50% yield, and 20—25% of the PhMe is recovered. Powdered pyrolusite treated with 50% NaOH, and various preps, of (I) obtained as by-products in different technical processes, may be used. R- T.

Recovery of volatile solvents. L. Musso (L’lnd. Chimica, 1934, 9, 1489—1495).—In a review of the plant used for the recovery of volatile solvents, the advantages of using solid adsorbents (particularly activated C), rather than absorbent liquids, is stressed.

D. R. D.Preparation of N.-YV. acid from 1-chloro-

naphthalene. N. N. V o rosh cov and P. V. K a r la sc h (Anilinokras. Prom , 1934, 4, 545—550).—a-NaphthoI- 4-sulphonic acid is obtained in theoretical yield by heating l-chloronaphthalene-4-sulphonic acid with 5% aq. NaOH (3 - ^ mols.) a t 200°/ l l —13 atm. for 7 h r , a t 225°/23—24 atm. for 1-5 h r , or a t 250°/38—40 atm. for 15 min. ^

B ritish C hem ica l A b s tr a c ts—B .

138 Cl. III .— O k q a k io I n t e r m e d ia t e s

Exhaustive sulphonation of [3-naphthylamine.I I . V. V. Ofitzerov (Anilinokras. Prom., 1934, 4 , 557—561 ; cf. B., 1935, 91).—A description is given of the analytical methods whereby the results described previously (loc. cit.) were obtained. R. T.

Preparation of ¡3-naphthol-l-sulphonic acid. 1.1.Vorontzov (Anilinokras. Prom., 1934, 4 , 565—569).— The highest yields (80%) are obtained according to U.S.P. 1,913,748 (B., 1934, 137). R. T.

Preparation of 2-aminoanthraquinone from an- thraquinone-2-sulphonic acid by the arsenic method. M. A. I ljin sk i and A. N. N ikolaeva (Auilino- kras. Prom., 1934, 4, 564—565).—2-Aminoanthra- quinone is obtained in 92—94% yield by heating anthraquinone-2-sulphonic acid with 26% aq. NH3 and NaoHAs04 a t 190—195°/40—42 atm. for 1-5 hr.

R. T.Hydrocarbons from gas. Mineral oil sulphonic

acids.—Sec II. Lacquer raw m aterials.—See X III. Determining free S in mercaptobenzthiazole.— See XIV. NH2-compounds in EtOH reservoirs. S compounds in sp irits.—See XVIII. Anaesthetic Et20 . Determining acetylsalicylic acid.—See XX.

See also A., Jan., 45, Electrochemical chlorination of CgHg. 62, Prep, of CC12(N 0 2)2. 70, Prep, of d-glutam ic acid. Catalytic hydrogenation of amides to amines. 72, Dehydration of acid am ides to nitriles. 74, Prep, of styrene. 77, Electrochemical prep, of tolylhydrazines. Prep, of 3 :3'-ditrif luoromethylhydrazobenzene. 79, Prep. o f 4-hydroxy-2-methylphenyl alkyl sulphides, and 4-n-butylresorcinol. 124, Formation of II2C20 4 from H C 02H by A. n iger. Citric acid ferm ent­ation.

P atents.Absorption of defines [and treatment of im m is­

cible liquids]. G. A. K ramer, Assr. to Shell Develop­ment Co. (U.S.P. 1,953,618, 3.4.34. Appl., 20.7.31).— Apparatus is claimed in which a mineral oil containing defines (I) is passed in countercurrent to H 2S 0 4 (II3P 0 4, HC1, etc.) (II) through a series of alternate agitating (III) and settling zones (IV), in which con­tiguous zones only are in communication and the hydrostatic heads of (I) and (II) in (IV) are in the same ratio as the amounts of (I) and (II) in (III). Treated material is removed from the apparatus a t a settling zone. IL A. P.

Catalytic hydration of defines. W. H. Sh iffler and M. M. H olm, Assrs. to Standard Oil Co. of Cali­fornia (U.S.P. 1,951,740, 20.3.34. Appl., 22.8.30).— The olcfine (I) (C.,H4, C3H 6) and steam are passed through 20—80% (72%) aq. II2S04 a t 120—150715—100 lb. per sq. in. partial pressure of (I) (150°/40 lb. per sq. in.) a t such a rate that (I) is only partly absorbed. The alcohol (II) and ether (III) produced are condensed, and the gases recirculated with addition of (II) or(III) if a single product is desired. H. A. P.

Inhibition of halogen-substitution reactions.R. M. D eanesly , Assr. to Shell D evelopment Co. (U.S.P. 1,952,122, 27.3.34. Appl., 11.11.31).—In the

direct chlorination of olefines in admixture with paraffins, substitution is inhibited by presence of 0 , (air).

H. A. P.Hydrolysis of halogen derivatives of hydro­

carbons. C. L. Ca m p b e l l , Assr. to E. B . B a d g e r & So n s Co. (U.S.P. 1,953,745, 3.4.34. Appl., 24.3.28).— Apparatus is claimed for the alkaline hydrolysis of alkyl chlorides (I) in presence of an ester of the alcohol con­cerned and a H 20-insol. aliphatic acid [e.g., C5Hn Cl + amyl oleate) in which a portion of the reaction liquid is withdrawn from the bottom of the digester (D), and after adding (I) passed through a heater of material resistant to HC1, mixed with aq. alkali, and returned to the top of D. H. A. P.

Preparation of n-propyl alcohol. C. O. Y o u n g and G. II. L a w , Assrs. to Ca r b id e & Ca r b o n Ch e m ic a l s Co r p . (U.S.P. 1,953,548, 3.4.34. Appl., 3.1.31).—g g Me> 0 (I), preferably with I I20 , is passed overA120 3 a t 250—400° (275°) and a ' space velocity of 48—120 vols./l vol. of catalyst/hr., and the products are mixed with II2 [4 X vol. of (I)] and passed over Ni a t 125—170° (150°). H. A. P.

Purification [and dehydration] of feri.-butyl alcohol. W. H. H artman, 'Assr. to E astman K odak Co. (U.S.P. 1,950,889, 13.3.34. Appl., 2.6.31).—The Bu'i'OH is heated (at the b.p.) with excess 0-C6lI4(C0 )20 , which combines preferentially with any H 20 and Bu“OH present, and distilled. The o-C6H 4(C 02H )2 formed is dehydrated and re-used. H . A. P.

Production of olefine alcohols and their deriv­atives. H. T. B 5 hme A.-G. (B.P. 421,218, 17.10.33. Ger., 10.2.33. Addn. to B.P. 413,909 ; B., 1934, 824).— A polyhydric sec.- or teri.-alipliatic alcohol (oc|x-octa- decanediol) is heated a t its b.p. (220—250°) with Ti, Zr, or Th hydroxide. H. A. P.

Manufacture of reaction products of glycols and boric acid. H. B e n n e t t (U.S.P. 1,953,741, 3.4.34. Appl., 15.7.32).—A glycol (di- or tri-ethylene glycol) is heated with H3B 03 (borax) and ZnCl, at 120—130°. The products are i I 20-sol., viscous liquids or resins of high mol. wt. and are used as adhesives. H. A. P.

Cyclic oxidation of alcohols to aliphatic acids. W. J. H ale and W. S. H aldeman (U.S.P. 1,951,280,13.3.34. Appl., 3.10.31).—An alcohol (EtOH, P r“OH + steam) is passed over a dehydrogenating catalyst (CuO) a t 150—350° (310—330°), part of the H 2 formed is removed (by diffusion), and the aldehyde vapours are passed over a reducible metallic oxide (CuO) a t the same temp. The acid formed is then separated and the residual products are recirculated. H. A. P.

Manufacture of esters. L. P. Brezinski and (a) P . K . F rolicii, (a) Assr. to Standard Oil D evelop­ment Co. (U.S.P. 1,951,747, 20.3.34. Appl., 12.4.29).— An olefine, an org. acid (I), and a salt of an acid stronger than (I) (ZnCl2) are heated at 100—300°/250—500 lb. per sq. in. (in absence of H 20). II. A. P.

Manufacture of esters of acrylic acid. W. B auer and H. L adth, Assrs. to R ohm & H aas Co. (U.S.P. 1,951,782, 20.3.34. Appl., 28.1.32. Ger., 29.1.31).— In the interaction of CH2X'H‘COCl with an alcohol (I)

B ritish C h em ica l A b s tr a c ts—B .C l . I I I . — O r g a n ic I n t e r m e d i a t e s . 139

or phenol (II), formation of esters of CHjCl'CH^'CC^H is prevented by use of •< 6 mols. of (I) or (II) or a corre­sponding amount of inert diluent, or by addition of sufficient base to combine with the HC1 formed. Prep, of the Me, Et, Pr, amyl, Ph, and CH2Ph esters is described. H. A. P.

Manufacture of esters. K. R. E d l u n d , Assr. to Sh e l l D e v e l o p m e n t Co. (U.S.P. 1,952,125, 27.3.34. Appl., 22.4.32).—A mixture of primary or sec.-alcohol (I) (BußOH, sec.-C5IIu -0II), excess of org. acid (II) (AcOH), and catalyst is heated until equilibrium is reached, and then fractionally distilled, a compensating- mixture of (I) and (II) being simultaneously added. From the stratified distillate equiv. amounts of ester and H20 are removed, and the residue is returned, as reflux.

H. A. P.Manufacture of fatty esters [glycerides]. P rocter

& Gamble Co. (B.P, 421,063, 13.6.33. U.S., 22.8.32).— Mono- and di-glycerides are produced by heating a triglyceride with glycerol a t 140—205° (200°) in absence of H aO and in presence of an alkali alkoxide (glycer- oxide). H. A. P.

Polymerisation of unsaturated organic materials.P. W. B r id g m a n and J. B. Co n a n t , Assrs. to E. I. Dü P o n t d e N e m o u r s & Co. (U.S.P. 1,952,116, 27.3.34. Appl., 5.7.29).—Conjugated compounds, e.g., isoprcne, CHPliICIi2, unsaturated aldehydes'and esters, or vinyl compounds are subjected to a pressure of < 2000 atm./80° (PhCHO as catalyst) or 6000 atm. (12,000 atm./room. temp.). If. A. P.

Preparation of acetic acid. R. L. B r o w n , Assr. toA t m o s p h e r ic N it r o g e n Co r p . (U.S.P. 1,953,905, 3.4.34. Appl., 20.6.31).—CO and MeOH are caused to interact (at 350—400°/200 atm.) in presence of 0-2—2 (0-3—0-8) mols. of ILO/mol. of MeOH and a Si phosphate catalyst.

H. A. P.Manufacture of formaldehyde in a solid state.

L. N a sc h (B.P. 420,993, 13.7.33. Austr., 15.7.32).— Aq. CII20 is evaporated in a vac. a t <C 32° (<C 20°), preferably after neutralisation and in presence of a protective colloid (egg-albumin) in amount insufficient to combine with all CH20 present. H. A. P.

Production of acetone from acetylene. W. P o h l , Assr. to D e u t s . G o ld - u . S il b e r -S c h e id e a n s t a l t v o r m . B o e s s l e r (U .S .P . 1,953,499, 3.4.34. Appl., 6.10.31. Ger., 6.10.30).—C2H2 and H 20 are passed over an oxide of Fe, Mn, Co, Th, Ce, or S n , and an 0 compound of Mg, Ca, Z n , or A1 at 250—700° (400—500°)/3—10 atm.

H. A. P.Manufacture of ketones. M. d e S im o , Assr. to

S h e l l D e v e l o p m e n t Co. (U.S.P. 1,952,702, 27.3.34. Appl., 17.1.31).—A sec.-alcohol (Pr^OH, BufOH, sec.-C5H11,OH) is passed over Cu-Zn alloy (brass) at 346—480° (370—430°) (in absence of 0 2). If. A. P.

Manufacture of am ines. J . Y. J o h n so n . FromI. G. F a r b e n in d A.-G. (B.P. 421,196, 3.7.34. Appl.,3.7.33).—Amides of carboxylic acids containing C8 are hydrogenated under vigorous conditions (H2-N i or -Co a t 250—400°£> 150 atm.). Examples are : laur- amide -> mono- and di-dodecylamines (Co-Al20 3 at 270°/200 atm . ) ; stearmethylamide -> C18H37-NHMe

(Ni-Cr at 200°/200 a tm .); octanilide -> octylanihne ; and laurtetrahydroquinolide ->• dodecyltetrahydroquin- oline. H. A. P.

Manufacture of acid amide[-alkylene oxide] derivatives. I . G. F a r b e n in d . A.-G. (B.P. 420,545,28.2.33. Ger., 29.2.32. Cf. B.P. 415,718; B., 1934, 954).—sec.- or ¿eri.-Hydroxyalkylamides of acids having <£ C9 are condensed with 3 mols. of alkylene oxide per active H. The products are dispersing, emulsifying, and levelling agents, and dyeing and general textile assistants. Examples are (3-lauramidoethanol (from coconut oil) + 30—70% of (CH2)20 (I) a t 140—70° (NaOII as catalyst), similar products from tallow and train oil, and stear- j3-hydroxyethylanilide + 32—33% of(I) a t 160—180°. The products may be esterified with polybasic inorg. acids. H. A. P.

Preparation of acid am ides. C. A. T h o m a s and J. F . O l in , Assrs. to S h a r p l e s So l v e n t s Co r p . (U .S .P . 1,954,433, 10.4.34. Appl., 20.8.32).—The appropriate acid and amine are distilled with an entraining liquid for the H20 formed. The prep, of acetamylamide, b.p. 130—135°/500 mm., and oleylamylamide b.p. 240—250°/ 5 mm. (n-C=Hn Ph as medium), is described.

H. A. P.Manufacture of reaction products of (a ) acid

am ides, (b ) fatty acids, (c) aliphatic hydroxy- compounds [with glycide]. I. G. F a r b en tn d . A.-G. (B.P. 420,883—4 and 420,903, [a— c] 2.3.33. Ger.,2.3.32).—(a ) Carboxyl- or sulphon-amides, (b ) fatty acids having <£ C8, and (c) a II20 insol. OH-compound con­taining > C8, are condensed with glycide « 2 equivs.). The products may be further etherified or esterified (converted into H sulphates), and are used as emulsifying, scouring, wetting, impregnating, dispersing, and softening agents. Examples of starting materials are : coconut oil acid amide of NH2-C2H4-OH, CH2Ph‘S02‘NH2, c;/cZohexyl-p-toluenesulphonamide, lauric acid, and lin­seed oil fatty acids. In (c), e.g., w-C^H^-OH (186 pts.) is condensed with (I) (250 pts.) in dioxan (1500 pts.) containing N(C2H4-0H )3 (0-5 pt.), and the product further condensed with (CH2)20 or sulphonated (H2S04 in C2iICl3) to give H20-sol. products. [Stat. ref.]

H. A. P.Preparation of aqueous em ulsions of water-

insoluble substances. H. B e n n e t t (B ,P . 420,760,15.6.33. U.S., 23.6.32).—Equal wts. of an alkylamine (1-5 pts.) [N(C2H4-OH)3] and an aliphatic acid having > C5 (linoleic acid) are heated together (at 90°) until homogeneous, and a resin or (carnauba) wax (12 pts.) is added (at 85—100°) to form a homogeneous mixture which is diluted with boiling H20 (50 pts.) with const, stirring. H. A. P.

[Manufacture of] textile assistants. I m p e r ia l Ch e m . I n d u s t r ie s , L t d ., and H. A. P ig g o t t (B.P. 420,518, 23.3.33).—A higher n-aliphatic acid is heated with a primary or sec. sugar amine and the resulting amide condensed, if desired, with (CH2)20 (I) « 5 mols.). The products are H20-sol., neutral dispersing agents. Examples are the stearyl [+ 9(1)], oleyl [+ 9(1)], and rieinoleyl derivatives of methylglucamine (glucose, NH„Me, and H2-Ni), and N-stearylglvmmine [+ 9(1)].

2 • H. A. P.

B r itis h C hem ical A b s tr a c ts—B .

140 C l . I V .— D y e s t u i t s .

Manufacture of alkylbenzenes. J. G. D a v id s o n , Assr. to Ca r b id e & Ca r b o n Ch e m ic a l s Co r p . (U.S.P. 1,953,702, 3.4.34. Appl., 8.11.29);—CGHG containing S derivatives is treated with an olefine and A1C13 or F e d , (at the b.p.). The product is free from S.

3 II. A. P.Preparation of l-phenyl-3 :4-dihydroxybenzene

[3 : 4-dihydroxydiphenyl]. A. W. H a r v e y , Assr. to E. R . S q u ib b & So n s (U .S .P . 1,952,755, 27.3.34. Appl.,7.5.32).—A 3-halogeno-(chloro-)4-hydroxydiplienyl is heated with an aq. alkali hydroxide or carbonate at ^>200° (240—300°). The product has m.p. 144-8— 145-2° (Ac2 derivative, m.p. 77-5—78°). H. A. P .

Manufacture of thiourea compounds. I. G.F a r b e n in d . A.-G. (B.P. 420,981,12.6.33. Ger., 13.6.32). —The chloride of a carboxyarylthiocarbimide (CSC12 and an aminoarylcarboxylic acid) is condensed with an aromatic amino(sulphonic) acid, and the product further condensed with a different NH2-compound to form the thiocarbamide. Examples are : m-C6H4(NCS)-COCl (I) + H - acid or + 1 : 5 : 7 - NH2-C10HB(SO3H )2 + m - NHo-CfiH4-C02H (I I ) ; (I) -1- m - NII2-CGH4-S03H +(II)“; (I) + 1 : 2 : 5-NH2-C6H3(S03H )2 + 1 :4 :3 -NH2-C6H3(N02)-S0sH ; y-C6H4(NCS)-COCl + l"-2"- amino -p - toluamido - 3' - benzamidonaphthalene -4 :6 :8- trisulphonicacid + 2 : 5 : 7-NH2-C10H5(S03H)o; (I) + p- NH2-C6H4-S03H + NH3, NH2Ph, or NHPhMe.

H. A. P.Production of alkyl derivatives of phenolic

compounds [p-tert.-am ylphenol]. Sh a r p l e s S o l­v e n t s Co r p ., Assees. of C. A. T h o m a s (B.P. 420,636,7.2.34. U .S ., 24.3.33).—An olefine mixture (n- + iso-CgHjo) is treated with H 2S04 sufficient to dissolve preferentially only the desired olefine (iso-CsH10) ; the acid layer is treated with a phenol (I) in 100% (3—10%) excess, the acid that separates is removed, [0-1—0-65 equiv. of (I) is added], and the residual solution is boiled under reflux to produce the C-alkyl- phenol (II) and distilled in a vac. A further yield of(II) is obtained by heating the still residue with (I).

H. A. P.Manufacture of compounds of diphenylamine-

sulphone series. I. G. F a r b e n in d A.-G. (B.P. 420,444,1.6.33. Ger., 2.6.32).—2 : 2'-Unsubstituted diphenyl- amines are heated with oleum £> 25% free S03) at > 50° and SOsH is removed, if desired, from the diphenylaminesulphonesulphonic acids formed. Thus NHPh2 (1 pt.) and 48% oleum (9-5 pts.) a t 80° give a tetrasulphonic acid, which is hydrolysed to diphenyl- aminesulphone, m.p. 257—259°. Other examples include the prep, of 2-hydroxy-, m.p. 285° ( 1 : 3 : 6 : 8-telra- sulphonic add), 2-chloro-, 2-metkoxy-, and 3-amino- diphenylaminesulphcme, m.p. 270° ( 1 : 6 : 8-trisulphonic acid). H. A. P.

Production of monocarboxylic acids and their derivatives [from dicarboxylic acids]. A. O.J a e g e r , Assr. to Se l d e n Co . (U.S.P. 1,953,231—2,3.4.34. Appl., [a] 6.4.29, [b ] 8.4.29).—(a ) Aminobenzoic acids are prepared by heating nitrophthalic acids or their salts with liquid H20, H2, and reducing catalysts a t 150—400°. (b ) A polycarboxylic acid [o-C6H4(C02H)2 and derivatives], H20, and, if desired, a reducing gas

are passed over a dehydrating catalyst (e.g., Cu0-CaC03- pumice, A1 silicates, base-exchange materials a t 200— 450°). H. A. P.

Purification of phthalic anhydride. A. 0. J a e g e r , Assr. to S e l d e n R e s . & E n g . Co r p . (U.S.P. 1,953,937,10.4.34. Appl., 18.5.28. Can., 22.12.27).—0-CGH4(C0)20 produced by air-oxidation of C10H8 is decolorised and purified by refluxing or distilling over polymerisation catalysts (SiO„, pumice, zeolites, A120 3, Fe20 3, ZnO).

" H. A. P.[Manufacture of] reaction products of mercap-

toarylthiazoles and organic acid halides. M. W.H a r m a n , Assr. to R u b b e r Se r v ic e L a b o r a t o r ie s Co . (U.S.P. 1,951,052, 13.3.34. Appl., 1.7.31).—A solution of a benzenecarboxyhalide (BzCl) in a H20 -immiscible medium (C6H6) is added to an aq. solution of a salt of mercaptobenzthiazole (I) a t < 25° (10—15°). The Bz, Tp-nilrobenzoyl, m.p. 210—217°, o -pJitlialylbis-, m.p. 127—129°, and SOsEt derivatives of (I) are described.

H. A. P.Chlorination of hydrocarbons. L . A. L e v y and

D. W . W e s t (B.P. 420,520, 24.4.33 and 24.4.34).— C10HS is chlorinated in presence of FeCl3 until 40—44% of Cl is absorbed, the product is distilled (b.p. 300— 350°), and the distillate further chlorinated (in an inert diluent, e.g., CC14, + FeCl3). Purification by crystallis­ation (C2UC13 + CaO and fuller’s earth or active C) gives a white waxy product of m.p. 200—202°.

H. A. P.Purification of chloronaphthalenes. S. B r o w n

and E . R . H a n s o n , Assrs. to H a l o w a x Co r p . (U.S.P. 1,953,070, 3.4.34. Appl., 19.10.28).—A chlorinated C10H 8, ¿15° 1 -41—1 -43, is distilled at 10—15 mm. and the fraction, b.p. 225—250°, retained. H . A. P.

[Manufacture of] dye intermediates [azoanthr- anilic acid]. I m p e r ia l Ch e m . I n d u s t r ie s , L t d ., M . M en d o z a , and F. L . R o se (B.P. 420,825, 7.6.33).— Diazotised (i) 5-aminoacyl[acetyl]anthranilic acid or (ii) 2-nitro-5-aminobenzoic acid is coupled with an alde- hyde-bisulphite compound (Ar-CH2,S03Na derivative) ofo-NH2-C6H4-C02II, and the product (i) hydrolysed or (ii) hydrolysed and reduced. H. A. P.

Distillation of COMe2, EtOH, and BuOH.—See XVIII. Diazodinitrophenol.—See XXII.

I V — DYESTUFFS.Alkaline corrosion of m etals in the aniline dye

industry. Z. N. Sirkin (Anilinokras. Prom., 1934, 4, 570—573).—The resistance to corrosion by alkalis of various types of cast Fe varies considerably. Steel con­taining C 0 • 24, S i 0-70, M n0-50, S O -2, P 0-03, N i0 -6 , and Cr 13% is the most resistant. R. T.

Dyes for printing on paper.—See V.See also A., Jan., 86, Influence of chemical consti­

tution on visible colour of chalkones and coumar- anones. 91, New flavone dye.

P a t e n t s .

Manufacture of dyes [of the anthraquinone series] for anim al fibres. J . Y. J o h n s o n . From I. G.

B ritish C hem ica l A b s tr a c ts—B .C l . V .— F i b r e s ; T e x t i l e s ; C e l l u l o s e ; P a v e r . 141

F a r b e n in d . A .-G . (B.P. 420,149, 17 .3 .33).— Anthra- quinones carrying 1—4 a-NRR' groups, 1 or 2 (3- C0NR"R'" groups (R, R ', R", and R "' = IT, alkyl, aryl), and < 1 S03H are acid dyes. The following anfcliraquinones are described (m.p. in parenthesis):1-NH-, 4-;p-NH-CGH4Me, 2-C0*NH2 (255—257°), sulph- onated (blue); 1-NH2, 4-p-NH-CGH4Ph, 2-CO-NH2 (258—260°), sulpkonated (green-blue); 1-NHMe, 4-p- NH-C0H4Ph, 2-CO-NH, (245—247°), 1-NHMe, 4-p- NH-CGH4-NH2, 2-CO-NH2 (m.p. 258—260°); 1-NH2, 4- «-NH-CGH4-NH2, 2-CO-NHo (270—272°); 1-NHMe, i-p- NH-C6H4Me, 2-CO-NH,, (251—253°); 1-NHMe, 4-NHPh,2-CO-NH2 (216—218°); 1-NH2, 4-p-NH-CGH4Me, 2- CO-NHMe (242—244°); l-NHa, 4-NH-CGH4Ph, 2- CO-NHMc (251—254°); 1-NH2, 4-y-NH-CGH4-NH2, 2- CO-NHMe (228—230°); 1-NHMe, 4-p-NH-C6H4Me, 2- C0-NH2 (265—267°); 1-NHMe, 4-j>-NH-C6H 4Ph,. 2- C0-NH2 (271—273°); 1-NHMe, 4 p-NH-C6H4Me, 2- CO-NH-C6H u (246—248°); 1-NH2, 4-? -NH-CGH4Me, 2- CO-NH-C6Hu (228—230°); l-NH-C2H4-OH, i-p- NH-CGH4Me, 2-CO-NH-CGHu (223—235°); 1-NHPh, 2- CO-NHPh (179—181°), sulphonated (bordeaux-red);1 - 1) - NH-CGH4Me, 2-CO-NIL, (269—271°), sulphonated (red); l-?-NH-CGH4Me, 2-CO-NHMe (228—230°); 1-NH2, 4-Br, 2-CO-NHMe, sulphonated (orange-red); and various taurine derivatives. C. H.

Production and use of dyes [of the anthra- quinone series for acetate silk]. B r it . Celanese, L td . , G. II. E l l i s , and F. B rown (B.P. 420,591 and 3,17.2.32).—(a ) Anthraquinones carrying an a-NHAx, an a-OH, and an a-NH2 or -NHR (Ar = aryl of the CGH6 series, R = alkyl or aralkyl), and a further OH or NH2, or NHR, and, if desired, other substituents, are prepared by introduction of a-NHAr, or NH2, or NH2R in place of NH2, N 02, halogen, etc. (b ) 1 : 5- or 1 : 8- Dihydroxyanthraquinones carrying an a-NHAr' (Ar' = aryl) and an a-OIi, or -NH2, or -NHR, with no further substituents, are prepared by similar introduction of NH2 or NHR. Examples are : (a ) 8-amino-4 : 5-tri- hydroxyanthraquinone with o-anisidine ; leuco-1 : 4- diamino-5 : 6-dihydroxyanthraquinone with NH2Ph ; 1 - amino - 4 - anilino - 5 : 8 - dihydroxyanthraquinone with C2H4C1-0H ; (b ) 4 : 8-dinitroanthraruiin withNH2Ph ~, 4 : 5-dinitrochrysazin with j?-C6H4Me-NH2. The'products give blue shades on acetate silk. C. H.

Manufacture of dyes of the anthraquinone series.I. G. F a r b e n in d . A.-G. (B.P. 420,688, 6.6.33. Ger.,6.6.32).—A 4-halogeno-l-aminoanthraquinone-2-sulph- onic acid is condensed in aq. medium with a 4-aminocin- namamide, NH2-CgH4-CH:CH-CO-NHR (R = H, alkyl, aryl, or aralkyl), preferably in presence of an acid- binder and a Cu catalyst between 60° and the b.p., and, if desired, a H 20-sol. org. solvent. Examples are con­densations with 4-aminocinnamic methylamide, anilide, y-acetamidoanilide, and ^-auisidide. The products are blue to green-blue wool dyes and also dye cotton from neutral or weakly alkaline bath. C. H.

M anufacture of a-am inoanthraquinones. J. Y. J o h n so n . From I. G. F a r b e n in d . A.-G. (B.P. 420,359,20.11.33).—A 1-nitroanthraquinone having an ox-, thi-, or imin-azole nucleus attached by the medial C atom in the 2-position is heated (in an inert medium) with NH3

or a substance which generates it under the conditions used, e.g., urea, (NH4)2C03, or urethane. The products arc vat dyes. Thus l-nitro-2-anthraquinonoyl-2': 3'- anthraquinone-oxazole, -iminazole (products blue-red on cotton) (6 '-Ci-dcrivative ; yellow-red, the Cl is stable to vattiug), or -thiazole are heated with NH3 in PhN 02 a t 180—190°. Other starting materials arc l-nitro-2- anthraquinonoyl-1' : 2'-anthraquinone-thiazole and -im­inazole, and -2' : l'-anthraquinone-oxazole (yellow-red) (2'- 0 //-derivative, blue-red) and -thiazole. H. A. P.

Manufacture of [xanthone and thioxanthone] dyes. J . Y. J ohnson. From I. G. F arbenind . A.-G. (B.P. 420,743, 29.5.33).—-A 3 : 6-diamino(or substituted diamino)-xanthone or -thioxanthone, carrying CO, CS, or CC12 in meso-position, is treated with NH3 or a primary or sec.-amine, whereby NH2, NHR, or NR2 is introduced in position 10 and one ring becomes quinonoid. Examples are 3 : 6-(NMe2)2- and 3 : 6-(NEt2)2-derivatives with : aq. NH3 (yellow on paper); aq. o/ciohexylamine (green- yellow, fluorescent), NH2Ph (red-orange). C. H.

Manufacture of monoazo dyes. I. G. F arbenind. A.-G. (B.P. 420,775, 23.1.34. Ger., 24.1.33).—An arylamine of the CGHG series is diazotised and coupled with a coupling component of the pyrazolone or C10H8 series, a t least one component carrying an aliphatic alkoxy- acylamido-group ; or a corresponding aminoazo com­pound is alkoxyacylated. Examples include: 4-methoxy- acetethylamidoaniline (I) ->■ p-anisyl-y-acid (yellow- brown on wool); NH2Ph -> methoxyacetylH-acid (II) (red); (I) -> G- acid (orange); 4-benzethylamidoaniline -> (II) (blue-red); 4-methoxyacctcycIohexylamidoaniline -> 1 - (2' - chloro - 5' - sulphophenyl) - 3 - methyl - 5 - pyrazolone (yellow). C. H.

[Manufacture of] phenolic [and pyrazolone] com ­pounds of colour bases. R. B. P ayne, Assr. to N at. Aniline & Chem . Co., I nc. (U.S.P. 1,953,309, 3.4.34. Appl., 2.6.30).—Treatment of a basic dye in H 20 with a N a phenoxide or pyrazolone gives H20-insol. com­pounds, sol. in oils or alcohols. Examples are Brilliant Green (I) + [i-C10H7-ONa, Safranine + m-C6H4(OH)2, Quinizarine Green + ¡3-C10H7-OH, and (I) + phenyl- methylpyrazolone. H. A. P.

Manufacture of oxazine dyes. I. G. F arbenind . A.-G. (B.P. 420,683, 6.6.33. Ger., 4.6.32).—A benzo- quinone (I), where X = H or halogen and R = an

CO aromatic radical contain-X - / NYNH-R-ira2 in8 < 2 CGII4 residues, is

NH 'R'NH'" j)-X heated at 150—300° with2 \ / an acylating agent, prefer-

(I) ably in a high-boilingsolvent, with or without an oxidant. Examples a re : product from tetrachlorobenzoquinone (II) and 2 mols. of benzidine, with BzCl or CPhCl3, sulphonated (violet on cotton); product from (II) and 3-nitrobenzidine, with BzCl; product from chloranil and 4 : 4'-diaminodi- phenylurea, with BzCl, sulphonated (violet-blue).

C. H.Photographic sensitising dyes.—See XXI.

V - F I B R E S ; TEXTILES; CELLULOSE; PAPER.Natural and acquired resistance of animal hairs

to microbiological agencies. R. B urgess (J. Text

B ritish C h em ica l A b s tr a c ts—B .

^ C l . V .— P i b r e s ; T e x t i l e s ; C e l l u l o s e ; P a p e r .

Inst,, 1934, 25, t391—40Q).—Animal hairs vary con- siderabjy in their resistance to trypsin. Wool is protected against bacteria (I) and mould fungi by Eulan N, by K2Cr20 7, and especially by both together ; this pro­tection is due to chemical modification of the hair. Cutoh and K2Cj?a0 7 or CuSO,, also afford protection against (I). A. G.

Absorption of water by linen. II. Fabrics. JI. II.P r e s t o n and J. A. M a t t h e w (J. Text. Ipst., 1934, 25, t3 7 1 —390),—A dipping method is recommended for measuring the absorbency of linen fabrics ; the sinking test is less reliable. The completeness of' wetting of laundered, bleached linen is unaffected by yarn twist, yarn counts, or typo of weave, but is affected by the finishing conditions and especially by the cleanliness of the surface. Tho H 20 hold by the cloth after dipping, but not after mangling, is affected by yarn and cloth structure, and is greater for tow yarns than for line yarns. A. G,

Rapid ęhemical control of balloon fabrics. J.Rojek (Przemyśl Cheim, 1934, 18, 532—533).—An analytical procedure for the mass analysis of balloon fabrics is described, R. T.

Standard methods for determination of a-», PK Y-, and total alkali-soluble cellulose. Memo. No. 7. Fasehstqff-Analysenkomm. des Verein$ d e r Z ę lls to ff- u, Pa yier-Chemiker u.. -Ingenieure (Papier- l'a,br.t 1934, 32, 521—523).—Jentgen’s method for determination of «-cellulose (I) and apparatus therefor are described. For thę total alkali-50], cellulose (T\ part of the filtrate from (I) is treated with K2Cr20 7 and conc. H2SO,j and the remaining K2Cr207 is titrated with Fe(NH.l)2(S04)2, T being expressed- as, the equiv. of K ?Cr20 7 used. y-CeUulose (G) is obtained by pptn. from the filtrate from (1) with AęOH and the ¡3-cell.ulose is obtained, by the difl’ereuce T—G. In each ease accuracy of 0-2% is claimed. D. A. C.

Artificial silk. I. Composition and hygroscop- ioity of native and regenerated celluloses. J. W ie r - t e l a k (Przemyśl G'bcm., i.934 18, 648—65S).—1The analytical data given for cotton-wool,. nitrate (I), cupr-, ammonium (II), and viscose rayons (III), sulphite pulp, and Cro^s and Bevan cellulose indicate that of regener­ated celluloses the most profound chemical changes have been undergone by (I), and the least by (II) ; (I) has also the highest hvgroscopicity. 33% of the original pentosan content is present in (III). The K-celhilosccon- tent of the above products is diminished by repeated mercerisafcion with NaOH. R. T.

Colloid-chemical phenomena in the formation of viscose fibrę. I. N. M. So ko lo v a (J. Appl,Chem. Russ., 1934, 7 , 807—817),—The velocity of diffusion, v, of alkali from viscose to the surrounding liquid falls with time, both for H 20 and aq. glucose ( I ) ; in the latter case, the v of glucose from the bath to the fibre also diminishes. Maturation takes place more rapidly in (I) than ii) H20 ; the- action of (1) is similar to that of aq. NaaS03, and consists in acceleration of the process of coagulation of the viscose. R . T.

Submicroscopic structure of artificial silk. Iv.Oh a r a (Sci. Papers Inst. Phys. Chem. Res., Tokyo, 1934,

25, 152—158).—Colours produced by Ag and Au show that artificial silk has skin, rind, and inner layer ; with Bemberg silk there is a dark zone in tho centre. Dyed with oxamin-blue 4R and diamine-green HS the silks show metachromasy, from which it is inferred that the skin and rind are more dense than is tho inner layer. Dichroism is shown by silk treatod with colloidal Au (observation between crossed nicols ; the colour changes on rotation). Complex interference effects have been studied with sections 6 fi. thick observed between crossed nicols. R. S. B.

Steaming of wood. M. Robinov and V. Kondkat- eev (Zellstoff u. Papier, 1935, 15, 10—11).—Pine and aspen woods were steamed in an autoclave for 7, 9t and 11 hr, a t 4 and 5 atm., and subsequently ground. Thus the production increased up to 9 hr. steaming at 4 atm., after which it remained const, and only 2 -4% < when steamed a t 5 atm. 9 hr. steaming at 4 atm. gives the best results generally, apart from the colour and strength of the pulp produced, which, however^ was of uniform but medium quality. The total acid content of the con­densate increased with steaming time, but the furfur- aldehyde content reached a max. after 9 hr., when it again decreased, which is ascribed to partial decomp, of the lignin and cellulose. D. A. C.

Properties and chem ical treatment of flax straw.J. 'WiURTF.LAK (Arch, Chem. Farm., 1934, 2, 27—41).— The chemical processes involved in the purification and pulping of flax straw are described. R. T.

Properties of lim e half-stuff. D. S. Sokolovski (Bumazhn. Prom., 1934, 13, No. 3, 41—49).—Aspen afforded half-stuff similar to that of birch ; bleaching; gave yellow products. Spruce waste gave an inferior product. Ch. Abs.

Structure of cellulose. W. H. Barnes (Pulp and Paper Canada, 19,34, 35, 670—675).—A lecture.

H. A. H.Standard method for determ ining the copper

number of pulps. M em o. No. 8. F a s e r s t q f f - A n a l y - SENKOMM. DES VEREINS HER ZelI.STOFF- V. PaPIE R -Chemiker u. -Ingenieure (Papier-Fabr., 1935, 33, 1 • cf. B., 1934, 828).—The Schwalbe—Hagglund method is described. " i>. a . C.

Behaviour of cellular and fibrous m aterials in solutions of salts. M. L udtke (Papier-Fabr., 1934 32, 509 512, 528—534).—When pulp was soaked in HQ, washed free of acid, and introduced into a neutral aq, salt solution (S), the of S was lowered. The concn. of acid thus transferred to it was determined titrimetrically and expressed as e.c. of O-OliV-acid derived from 1 g. of bone-dry pulp (acid val. A). The effect is ascribed to the purely chemical exchange of the H' from the residual C02II groups in the fibre for the cation of S. No trace was found, of adsorption of the cation on the pulp. A is independent of the vol. and concn. of S, and the amount of pulp present, but depends primarily on the p n of S. The action of each iS is s p .: thus aq. Ca(OAc)2 gives higher A than the NH4 salt, but owing to hydrolysis of the salt formed on the fibre, A in aq. S is lower than in alcoholic S ; the latter therefore will give the abs. A. Investigation of a large 110. of different types of pulps shows that each.

B ritish C hem ica l A b s tr a c ts—BC l . V .— F i b r e s ; T e x t i l e s ; C e l l u l o s e ; P a p e r . 143

pulp had its characteristic A, depending on its derivation and processing. The highest A was given by beech pulp and the lowest by cotton. Bast fibres give falsely high A owing to the acid groups in the pectins present.

D. A. C.The Bewoid rosin-size process. G . F . K e n n e d y

(Paper Trade J., 1934, 99 ; T.A.P.P.I. Sect., 315). A brief description is given of the process, and a summary of the advantages claimed. H- A. H.

Application of rubber to paper fibres. Ii. B.Townsend (Paper Trade J., 1934, 99 ; T.A.P.P.I. Sect., 305—306).—Three general methods of applying rubber to paper fibres are reviewed, viz., beater addition prior to sheet formation (S), incorporation during S, and surface application after S. The optimum paper- making conditions affecting each of these methods are outlined. A no. of improved qualities in the finished paper are claimed, particularly as regards its improved folding and tearing strength, water- and grease-proof- ness, and printing properties. I t is maintained that rapid decomp, of the rubber owing to its contact with paper can be avoided by the use of antioxidants and

' by removing impurities from the cellulose fibres. I t is also possible to prevent irregular flocculation of the rubber coagulum. H.'A. H.

Clay and opacity [of paper]. R. J. D a v ie s (Pulp and Paper Canada, 1934, 35, 676—678).—High-grade china clay (I) is considered practically equal to pigments of higher n (Ti02, ZnS, etc.) in increasing the opacity of paper, owing to its small particle size. (I) is still the ideal paper filler, on account of its low d, good receptivity to printing ink, low degree of hardness, and low cost. H- A. H.

Application of acid dyes for printing on paper.V. K. Larjuschkina (Anilinokras. Prom., 1934,4, 573— 574).—Various triphenylmethanesulphonic acid dves can be used for printing on paper, when made up with glycerol, AcOH, starch, gum, Iaetic acid, and tannin, I'-

Colour in papermaking. E. L. P u f f e r (Paper Maker, 1934, Ann. No., 35—38).—Some factors aSecting the dyeing of paper are briefly reviewed. In calender- staining, the pn of the sheet and the colour solution should not differ by 2 units. H. A. H.

Decolor[is]ing of paper-machine broke [waste paper]. F. W. B in x s (Paper Trade J., 1934, 99; T.A.P.P.L Sect., 300—302).—The use of ZnS20 4 (I) in stripping paper dyed with a large no. of dyestuffs (listed) is advocated. (I) is most efficient when freshly prepared, and details of its large-scale prep, are given. I t is added to the paper stock a t 60°, and the temp, raised to 100° in 20—30 min. The addition of org. stabilising agents (aldehydes and ketones) is not advocated, since this necessitates a higher reacting temp., tends to turn the stock yellow, and is more- costly. H. A. H.

Tentative basis for specifications on wax size [for paper]. H. S in c l a ir (Paper Trade J., 1934, 99’; T lA .P.Pj. Sect;, 311—312).—A survey. I t is suggested that the solid content, amount of stabiliser, m.p. of wax used,, etc. shall be specified. H. A.. H.

Microscopical examination of paper. J. B.Calkin (Paper Trade J., 1934, 99 ; T.A.P.P.I. Sect., 267—276).—A survey, chiefly of existing methods of identifying and measuring papermaking fibres by microscopical methods. An extensive bibliography is given. A-

Determining the twisting of cable papers with the Schopper torsion tester. R . K o rn and C. B o e r n e r (Papier-Fabr., 1935, 33, 2—5).—The results are independent of the rate of application of twist, but cc the length of test strip. They are also com paratively insensitive to differences in basis wt., especially between 39—92 g./sq. m. 20 tests gave a 2% accuracy of duplication. D. A. C.

Zeiss photometer.—See I. Metals in the paper industry.—See X.

See also A., Jan., 31, Lowering the -q of cellulose nitrate solutions. 42, Acetylation of ramie. 70, Separation of cellulose acetates.

P a t e n t s .

Coating of tennis-racket strings. W . E . G l e d h il l (TJ.S.P. 1,956,441, 24.4.34. Appl., 24.1.31).—The strings are coated with an aq. colloidal suspension, e.g., of starch and gum arabic, together with an equal amount of a light-sensitive chemical, e.g., a 1—4% aq. solution of Na,Cr,0~, and are then dried and exposed to sunlight.

2 2 ' S .S .W .Production of cellulose for viscose-making.

G. A. R ic h t e r , Assr. to B r o w n Co. (U.S.P. 1,955,092,17.4.34. Appl., 19.10.31).—Sheeted pulp is steeped in aq. 10—18% NaOH containing < 1% NaOCl for J—2 hr. a t 20—50°. The sheets are then removed, separated from the steeping solution, and immersed in aq. 18% NaOH so as to displace residual NaOCl. I t may. then be directly xanthated. I t is claimed that the period of ageing the cellulose prior to xanthation is thereby eliminated. D. A. C.

Preparation of regenerated cellulose structures. W Schwalbe and 0 . Schjeeoko, Assrs. to K alle & Co. A.-G. (U.S.P. 1,943,346,16.1.34. Appl., 30.6.31. Ger.,11.7.30).—Viscose solution containing 6% of cellulose is mixed with 1% of TiO^ and the product moulded into opaque sheets, films, tubes, or bands which have a greater strength than those containing 4% of BaSO^.

Production of artificial wool from seaweed.T. Gohda (B.P. 420,857, 22.1.34) —A jelly-like substance prepared from seaweed and containing algin, mannitol, protein, and crude cellulose matter is dissol\ ed in an NH3 solution of Cu and Zn salt containing NH4C1 and tannin, allowed to mature, and spun into a pptg; bath composed of “ furfnrol s a lt” (prep, described), tanmc acid, a sulphate, II2S04, EtOH, and CHa0 ; the thread is afterwards treated with a mixed solution of a pet' borate, carbonate, and acetate, washed, sized with a brown alga prep., and dried. F. R. E,

Treatment of sulphite pulp and liquor, T. L.D u n b a r (U.S.P. 1,955,057, 17.4.34, AppL, 13.4.32).— A de-gassing chamber (G) is placed over a coil exchanger (H) and connected with it by a passage (i )

B ritish C hem ica l A b s tr a c ts— B.C l ; VI.— B l e a c h in g ; D y e i n g ; P r i n t i n g ; F i n i s h i n g .

containing a series of baffles. At the end of the cook the spent liquor (L ) and gases are led through a strainer placed in the bottom of the digester (D) into G. The gases escape and are recovered, and L cascades through P into H and heats wash-H20, flowing through the coils, either into the top of D or into the blow-pit. L may then either flow to waste or be pumped again into the top of D. L may be agitated in II by means of air or steam jets. D. A. C.

Recovery of ammonia from cook liquor [from wood pulping], R . W. R ichardson, Assr. to E. I. Du P ont de Nemours & Co. (U.S.P. 1,94-3,345, 16.1.34. Appl., 16.4.31).—Waste sulphite liquor is treated with milk-of-CaO while still hot and passed down a packed tower up which a current of air is blown to expel the NH3 and some H 20 vapour. The gases are cooled to condense aq. NH3 and the uncondensed NH3 is absorbed in aq. S02 to regenerate NH4HS03. A. R . P.

Preparation of cellulose acetate film s. E. S.Earrow and S. J . Carroll, Assrs. to' E astman K odak Co. (U.S.P. 1,954,312, 10.4.34. Appl., 18.3.29).—The formed film of cellulose acetate dope on a supporting surface is immersed in a non-aq. coagulating bath containing < 75% of a high-boiling plasticiser (P), e.g., triacetin, (C6H4Me)3P 0 4, C10H,C1, stripped, and washed with a solvent (EtOH) for P. F. R. E.

Manufacture of cellulose esters [sulphates].L. R ubenstein , and I mperial Chem . I ndustries, L td . (B.P. 420,529, 30.5.33).—Cellulose, m ateria l containing it, or a near conversion p roduct (soda-cellulose) is trea ted a t > 70° w ith (a) S02C12, or (b) C1S03H (>0-5 mol. per CcH10Os unit) in presence of a base, e.g., NaOH (in the form of soda-cellulose) for (a) and C5H5N for (b), until it is capable of substantially complete dissolution in 10% aq. NaOH; when using (a) the material is preferably pretreated with > J mol. propor­tion of CH2C1-C02H. The solution of the ester in alkali may be formed into films or threads by coagulation in acid (H2S04). p . r . e .

Treatment of substitution derivatives of cellulose.C. D reyfus and G. Schneider, Assrs. to Celanese Corp. op America (U.S.P. 1,954,729, 10.4.34. Appl., 26.8.29).—In order to increase their heat-resistance and diminish their corrosive action on metals, org. esters and ethers of cellulose are treated with an alkylolamine, e.g., N(C2H4-0H )3 ; if desired, they may also be pre­viously or subsequently subjected to the action of NaOCl, ground, and freed from finer particles containing most of the impurities. F. R. E.

Manufacture of cuprammonium artificial silk. B r it . Bemberg , L td . (B .P. 420,785, 16.4.34. Ger.,15.4.33).—In the funnel-spinning process, the material is pptd. by a liquid (L) of extremely small pptg. power (softened H 20, with or without NH3) at > 30°, but under otherwise normal conditions, e.g., withdrawal velocity, forwarding of spun material, and titre of filaments, the pptg. action of (L ) and the diam. of the spinning nozzle being related in such a way th a t the weaker pptg. action is compensated for by corresponding enlargement in nozzle aperture above a min. limit of1-5 mm. diam. F. R. E.

Spinning solution. E. K lin e , Assr. to Du P ont R ayon Co . (U.S.P. 1,956,034, 24.4.34. Appl., 20.12.30). —To obtain greater uniformity in low-lustre viscose products, the mixture of lustre-reducing agent (I) (mineral oil) and dispersing agent (Monopole oil) is treated with 1 pt. of creaming preventive (pine oil, terpineol) to 5—10 pts. of (I) and is then added to the solution prior to coagulation. F. R. E.

Spinning [fast-coloured artificial filaments].C. W. P almer, Assr. to Celanese Corp. op America (U.S.P. 1,955,825, 24.4.34. Appl., 29.10.30).—A conc. suspension of a finely-divided pigment is mixed with the spinning solution while in transit to the machine and shortly before reaching the jet. F . R . E.

Production of tubular artificial textile threads.Alsa Soc. Anon., R. P icard, and R. F ays (B.P. 421,157,5.6.34).—Tubular, non-partitioned fibres are spun from viscose, containing a substance capable of liberating a gas in the coagulating bath (B), by regulating the travel in B to 25 cm. and the subsequent air travel to < 1 5 0 cm. F . R. E.

Manufacture of protein [paper-coating] product.C. N. Cone and E. D. B rown, Assrs. to Glidden Co. (U.S.P. 1,955,375, 17.4.34. Appl, 5.3.30).—Ground, oleaginous seed cake (e.g., soya bean, cottonseed, etc.) is treated with a weakly alkaline aq. salt (e.g., Na2S03), the insol. material separated, and the protein (P) in the clear liquor denatured with Ca(OII)2. P is then pptd. by adjusting the pa to 4-0—4-4-“with H 2S04. The lower-grade P contained in the residue after treat­ment with Na2S03 may be recovered by similar pptn. after dissolution in conc. NaOH. D. A. C.

Washable wallpaper. L. C. F leck , Assr. to P aper P atents Co. (U.S.P. 1,955,626, 17.4.34. Appl,31.5.33).—The web of low-cost body paper is coated with a mineral filler containing a H20-resistant binder (B), printed with a H20-ink containing B, and the surface fixed with alum and CH20 or Al(OAc) etc. A glossy surface may then be obtained by applying small quantities of wax emulsions and polishing with brushes. D. A. C.

H igh-glaze finish [for paper etc.].—See VI. Polishing etc. cloths.—-See VIII. Affixing stam ps.—See XV.

V I.— BLEACHING ; DYEING ; PR IN TIN G ; FINISHING.Reserving the wool in dyeing cotton-wool

m ixture fabrics. R a r e (Textilber, 1935, 16, 47).— Katanol W (LG, B , 1926, 484) is replaced by Katanol- WL (I) and -SL (II) as additions to the dyebath, to prevent absorption by the wool of the direct dyes used for colouring the cotton. (I) and (II) are fast to light, and hence their presence in the reserved wool does not promote brown discoloration when the dyed material is exposed to sunlight. The reserving actions of (I) and (II) are maximal a t 50° and 60°, respectively, but (II) may be used a t 80—90° with only a small loss of efficiency. A. J. H.

Rubber m ixture for the Gordon Bennett Cup balloons. S. Mazurek and Z. J osse (Przemysł Chem, 1934, 18 , 481—483).—The fabric should be coloured

B ritish C h em ica l A b s tr a c ts— B .Cl. V I I—A c id s ; A l k a l i s ; S a l t s ; N o n -M e t a l l ic E l e m e n t s . 145

red or yellow to protect the mixture from actinic rays, and be impregnated on botb sides with Re vertex mixture. R. T.

Corrosion of m etals by dyes.—See IV. Absorption of H20 by linen. Artificial silk. Colour in paper- making. Decolorising waste p aper—See V.

P a t e n t s .

Treatment of textile and other fibrous materials.N. V. Ch e m . F a b r . “ Se r v o , ” and M. D. R o zen bro ek (B.P. 420,812, 1.5.33. IIo ll, 2.5.32).—The use as cleansing, wetting, emulsifying, and dispersing agents of ethers derived from higher aliphatic mono- or poly- hydric alcohols and aliphatic hydroxy-aldehydes, -ketones, -carboxylic acids, -amines, or -mercaptans having > C6 and > 20H, and derived ethers, (sulphuric) esters, or sulphonic acids, is claimed. Examples are octadecenyloxytricarballylic acid, octadecyl- and cetyl- oxyacetaldehyde, dodecyl- and dioctadecenyl-oxyacet- one, the amine from dodecyl a-glyceryl ether chloro- hydrin (I) and NH3 or C2H4(NII2)2 and the H sulphate of the former, the sulphonated thiol from (I) and NaSH, Na octadecenyloxyacetate (II) and its (3-diethyl- aminoethylamide, condensation product of (II) with C2H4Cl-S03Na and 0H-CH(CH2-S03Na)2, and octa- decenyloxy-glycollaldehyde and -glycollic acid. ^

Dyeing of pelts, furs, or the like. W . W . G r o v e s . From I. G. F a r b e n in d . A.-G. (B.P. 420,751, 2.6.33).— Diaminoaryl alkyl sulphides are used as oxidation dyes to give grey to brown and black shades. Examples are : 2 : 4-diaminophenyl E t and [3-hydroxyethyl, 2 : 5- diamino-4-methoxyphenyl E t, and 4-chloro-2-amino-5- pY-dihydroxypropylaminophenyl E t sulphide, and 4 : 6- diamino-1: 3-di(ethylthiol)- and -1 : 3-di-((3-hydroxy- ethylthiol)-benzene. H. A. P.

Printing of cellulosic materials with dyes. Soc. Ch e m . I n d . i n B a sl e (B.P. 420,729, 18.12.33. Switz, 22.12.32).—Deeper and faster prints are ob­tained with acid dyes free from co-ordinated metals or lake-forming groups by addition of urea, CS(NH2)2, NH,-CS-NH-G0-NH2, or biuret to the printing paste.

H. A. P.High-glaze finish for fabrics and the like. A. W.

B a te m a n and R. E. T h o m a s , Assrs. to E. I. Du P o n t d e N em o u r s & Co. (U.S.P. 1,954,751, 10.4.34. Appl.,12.10.32).—The material is treated with a non-brittle undercoat composed of cellulose nitrate and blown cottonseed oil in a volatile solvent (EtOH and EtOAc) to prevent penetration of the subsequently applied lustrous top coat of varnish, consisting of fatty oils (linseed aud tung) with a polyhydric alcohol-polybasic acid (“ glyptal ” ) resin and driers in a volatile solvent ^toluol).

Treatment of textile m aterials, (a ) H. A. L u b s and H. W . W a l k e r , (b ) C. Z. D r a v e s and (a ) , Assrs. to E. I. Du P ont d e N e m o u rs & Co. (U.S.P. 1,953,908—9,3.4.34. Appl., [ a ] 27.1.31, [b ] 25.3.32).—(Cotton) goods dyed with S blacks are protected against tendering by treatment with (a ) a H 20-sol. fluoride (I) (2% NaF or KF) and (b) (I) plus a sol. soap or neutral sulphonated oil. P.-

Fur-treating [carroting] composition and pro­cess. W . C. M e r c ie r , Assr. to A j i e r . H a t t e r s & F u r r ie r s Co. (U.S.P. 1,955,678,17.4.34. Appl., 28.3.31). —Fur having improved felting properties is obtained by using a carroting liquor (L) prepared by adding 1—10 pts. "of 50—100-vol. H20o to 10—1 pt. of the usual L [aq. Hg(N03)2 + HN03] o"f d 1 • 050—1 • 115. A. J. II.

Dyeing of bobbins of cotton slubbings and rovings. C. Ca l l e b a u t and J. D e B l ic q u y (B.P. 421,350, 3.8.33).

[Machine for] drying and fnishing of [knitted] textile fabrics. W . S h e r r a t t and W . R. Cooke (B.P. 419,144, 1.5.33).

Acid amide derivatives. Textile assistants.— See III. Dyes for acetate silk.—See IV. T i com ­pounds [as mordants].—See VII.

V I I — A C ID S; A LK ALIS; SA L T S; NON- METALLIC ELEMENTS.

Complete regeneration of ammonium chloride lyes, and the cylic process for production of soda by the Solvay method. A. K r a u s e and J. W o jc ie ­c h o w sk i (Przemysł Chem., 1934, 18, 445—449).— The mother-liquor from NaIIC03 is heated to remove free NH3, and the resultant solution is conc. to saturation with respect to NaCl, and cooled, when NH4C1 separates. The mother-liquor, containing 24-21 g. of NaCl and 20-61 g. of NH4C1 per 100 g. of H20 a t 15°, is converted into a saturated ammoniacal solution of NaCl by adding the requisite quantity of Na2C03 and H 20, and further NH3 is introduced to a final proportion of NaCl: NH3 = 1 :1 • 06 ; the resultant solution is returned for NaHC03 production. R- 'I'•

Utilisation of natural sodium sulphate for soda and ammonium sulphate production. Treatment of the mother-Iiquors obtained in the decompos­ition of mirabilite by ammonia and carbon dioxide. A. P. B e l o p o l s k i and N. P. A l e x a n d r o v (J. Appl. Chem. Russ, 1934, 7, 687—724).—A process for the utilisation of the mother-Iiquors obtained in the prep, of Na2C03 from Na2S04 and NH4IIC03, and containing (NH4)2S04 (I), Na2S04, NH4HC03, and (NII4)2C03, is described ; it consists in adding 17 vols. of eutonic solution per 100 vols. of mother-liquor and freezing at —15°, when all of the Na2S04 is pptd. as mirabilite, together with 40% of the (NH4)2C03 and NII4IIC03, and is returned to the soda process, whilst the mother- liquor is made neutral with H2S04 or CaS04, and the resulting 35% aq. (I) is evaporated to yield 99% (I).

R. T.Treatment of langbeinite. T. K u c z y ń s k i (Przemysł

Chem, 1934, 18, 458—464).—The chief impurities of technical importance in Polish langbeinite (I) are kieser- ite, Ca salts, and clay. Industrial processes are de­scribed, serving for the production of K 2S04, schoenite(II), reichardite, and leonite from (I), and of K2S04 from(II). R - T-

Treatment of langbeinite. I. Velocity of dissol­ution of native langbeinite. D . L a n g a u e r [with W . P a w l a k ] (Przemysł Chem, 1934, 18, 464—470). The velocity of dissolution, v, of langbeinite (I) is greatest in

B ritish C h em ica l A b s tr a c ts—B .

146 Cl. VII.—A c id s ; A l k a l i s ; S a l t s ; N o n -M e t a l l io E l e m e n t s .

H20, and least in tlie mother-Iiquors remaining after crystallisation of (I) solutions; the vals. for saturated aq. NaCl, K2S04, and MgS04 are intermediate. At 60° v is a t 80°, and a t all temp, studied increases with the fineness of milling of (I). The significance of the above findings for the K industry is discussed. R. T.

Analysis of calcium fluoride. A. K . K udrevatov (Compt. rend. Acad. Sci. U.R.S.S, 1934, 4, 42—43).— CaF2 is readily dissolved in conc. IIC1 on heating in presence of chlorides ; Mg and Li chlorides are best used for analysis because of the solubility of their oxalates in H20. ‘ A .B .D . C.

Mechanism of desilication of aluminates. I. I. I s k o ijd siu and O. S. D r u s h in in a (J. Appl. Chem. Russ, 1934, 7, 740—752).—Alkaline solutions of Si03 and A120 3 obtained in the A1 industry do not contain definite salts, but are colloidal solutions of Si02 and Al(OH)3 ; the colloids undergo mutual coagulation, with the result that the prep, of ppts. of solutions entirely free from one or the other colloid is not possible. A detailed study is made of the optimum conditions of pptn. of Si02, with reference to tem p, time, relative concns. of Si02and A1(0H)3, and [NaOH]. R, T. "

Influence of the carrier on the contact properties of vanadium pentoxide. M. 0. Ch a r m a n d a r ia n and B r o d o v it sc h (J. Appl. Chem. Russ, 1934, 7, 725—728).—CuS04 augments the catalytic activity (I) in the reaction 2S02+ 0 2 -> 2S03 of V20 5 adsorbed on Mn02, infusorial earth (II), porcelain (III), and asbestos(IV), and lowers (I) when the carriers are glass, quartz(V), or sand (VI). Fe2(S04).j inactivates Vs0 5 on. (V) or (VI), considerably increases (I) with (IV), and slightly with Mn.0,, (II), and (III). BaCl2 only slightly increases (I) with all carriers except (V) and (VI). Al. alums and MnS04 greatly increase (I) with Mn03, and enhance the stability of the cata lyst; other carriers are notsignificantly affected. R. T.

Determination of impurities in commercial carbon monoxide. H. R. Ambler and T. C. Suttqn (Analyst, 1934, 59, 809—811).—Separate samples of the gas are used for the determination of H 2 -j- CH4 4- N2 (I), 0 2, C02> and carbonyls (II). (I) are deter­mined in the apparatus described previously (A, 1929, 1262). They are first conc. by partial absorption of CO, the CO is then completely removed by shaking with small quantities of ammoniacal CuCl, air is admitted, and H2 and CH4 are successively removed by combustion. 0 a is determined by the method recently described (A, 1934, 268), C0a by absorption with aq. Ca(0H)3, and (II) by analysis of the mirror formed by passing the gas through a glass tube a t 300—400°. A sample of commercial CO contained H2 0-14—0-16, GEL 0-013—0-016, N2 0-37—0-43, 0 2 < 0 -0 1 , C02 0-011— 0 -012, Fe(C0)5 0-0004, and Ni(CO)4< 0-00005%. The % of (II) increases on keeping. E. C. S.

Production of sulphur dioxide and Portland cement from gypsum . Ł . W a s il e w s k i , J . Z . Za l e s k i , A. K a c z o r o w sk i, and W . B a d z y ń s k i (Przemysł Chem, 1934, 18, 633—647).-—75% of the CaS04 is decomposed to yield Portland cement (I) and S02, by heating for 15 milt, a t 1150° with 10% of coke and a mixture of oxides (Si02 +• Al-jOg, with 1 -5% of Fe203) in the

proportion corresponding with that in (I). On a tech­nical scale, using a continuous-process rotatory oven, and charging a mixture of CaS04 17-2, clay 1-62, Fe ore0-38, and coke 1-72 pts. a t an optimum rate for the given apparatus, 75% decomp. is attained at 1210°, with a content of 3-5% S02 in the issuing gases, and of 4% CaS and 24% CaS04 in the product. R. T.

SiOa gel for oil regeneration.—See II. Inter­action of C aS04 and clay.—See IX. H2 for steel decarburisation.—See X. Luminescence of ferti­liser phosphates. Spray-drying insecticides.— See XVI. H20 purification by 0 3. Determining sulphide-S.—See XXIII.

See also A , Ja n , 25, Diffusion of gases through metals. 41, Effect of 0 3 and air on m etals. 43, Catalyst for production of HNOa from NH3. 45, A.-c. electrolysis of N a2COa and NaHCG3 solu­tions. 48, [Thermal] decomp. of N a2C 03. 50,Blue ultramarine. Prep, of standard ThCl4 solu­tions, and of NH4Ns. 56, Volumetric determination of T i. 57, Liquefaction of He.

P a t e n t s .

Continuous manufacture of hydrochloric acid.Auer. Cy a n a m id Co, Assees. of H. A. K a s t (B.P. 418,335, 2.2.34. U.S., 8.6.33).—A mixture of NaCl (120) and 98% H2S04 (98 lb.) is fed continuously into the colder end (315°) of a rotary furnace through which is passed a current of hot combustion gases from the discharge end (650°). A. R. P.

Purification of phosphoric acid. V ic t o r Ch e m . W o r k s (B.P. 417,226, 13.2.34. U.S., 4.5.33).—TheCu, As, and Pb are removed as usual with H2S and H2S04 and the remaining Pb is pptd. in the 50—75% acid by addition of an iodide (I) or bromide, preferably to the H2S-saturated acid. With (I) the Pb can be reduced to > 1 p.p.m. A. R. P.

Production of alkali-metal and ammonium nitrates. J. Y. J o h n s o n . From I. 6 . F a r b e n in d . A.-G. (B.P. 419,232, 30.8.33).—The chlorides are wholly ot partly dissolved in aq. HN03, the HC1 being expelled by distilling the mixture under reduced pressure with steam, preferably superheated. The expelled vapours are passed through a rectifying column to recover H N03, which is returned to the reaction vessel. W. J. W.

Manufacture of alkali nitrate from calcium nitrate and alkali chloride. I. G. F a r b e n in d A.-G (B.P. 415,660, 26.2.34. Ger, 17.3.33).—In the manu­facture of NaN03 by passing aq. Ca(N03)3 through a succession of towers filled with Na-zeolite (Z) the fresh or regenerated Z is pretreated with several wash-liquors of increasing [N03'], obtained by washing exhausted Z, and the exhausted Z is washed with several wash- liquors of decreasing [N0 s'J obtained in the preceding operation. A. R. P.

Manufacture of alkali sulphides. W. W. Gr o v e s . From N . V. S t ik s t o f b in d in g s in d . “ N e d e r l a n d ” (B.P. 419,567, 28.12.33).—H2S or COS is caused to react a t 400—800° with an alkali carbonate (I) or such a carbon­ate containing hydroxide, in presence of an inert gas, such as CO, H2, CH4, or N 2. Instead of (I), an

B ritish C hem ical A b s tr a c ts—B .Cl. VII.—A c id s j A l k a l i s ; S a l t s ; N o n -M e t a l l ic E l e m e n t s . 147

alkali sulphide (II) containing (I) or alkali hydroxide, or materials from which such (II) is formed, i.e., Na2S04 and water-gas, may be used. W. J. W.

Manufacture of ammonium sulphate. U nion Ch im . Belge Soc. Anon, and J. Guillissen (B.P.419,844,15.12.33. B'elg, 17.12.32).—Removal of impur­ities from the mother-liquor in the treatment of NH3 with H2S04 is effected by first adding a solution of an Fe salt” e.g., FeS04, until the As content is = or < 2 | times the Fe content. The liquors are then treated at 60° with NH3 until there is excess NH3 of 160—800 mg./litre, and air or 0 2 is blown in to ppt. the impurities, these being removed and used as a fungicide. W. J. W.

Preparation of fluosilicates [silicofluorides]. I n -ternat . R efin in g Co, Ltd . From L. B rann (B.P. 415,972, 26.3.34).—Difficultly sol. silicofluorides, e.g., Na2SiF0, are peptised by heating or treating in a colloid mill with solutions of salts of metals which form more sol. silicofluorides, e.g., with MgS04 or CaCl2, and with polyhydric alcohols, e.g., glyccrol, and aq. NH3 or org. bases, e.g., NH2Ph. A. R. P.

Production of monocalcium phosphate. K a l i- F o r sc h u n g s-A n s t a l t G.m.b.H. (B.P. 419,641, S.3.34. Ger, 31.3.33).—Crude phosphate is caused to react with H2S04, the liquor obtained by washing the CaSO.j produced being used in the process. A solution is obtained that is fully saturated in the hot state with CaHP04 and almost saturated with the Ca2 salt, from which, after separation of the crude phosphate residue and the deposited CaS04, pure CaHP04 (I) is crystallised out by cooling. The mother-liquor may be introduced after suitable evaporation. The H 2S04 may be used in such concn. that the H 2Q introduced with it as wash-H20 leaves the process as H 20 of crystallisation of the CaS04 and (I), evaporation of the liquor being thus rendered unnecessary. W. J. W.

Treatment of acid [spent pickling] solutions. W. W. Triggs. From Chem. Construction Corp., T. C. Oliver , and S. F. Spangler (B.P. .418,894, 28.1.33). —Spent pickling acid containing FeS04 is heated with Fe oxides (resulting from a later stage of the process) at 110—115° until the free acid is neutralised, and is then evaporated to dryness. Calcination of the dry residue with coal dust, FeS, or FeS2 affords S02 for making H2S04 and Fe oxides for use again as neutralising agents. A. R. P .

Treatment of aluminium sulphate-containing minerals and salts. L. Nordenflycht and C. E. Bustos (B.P. 419,090,9.6.33).—Alunite or similar mineral is intimately mixed with alkali chloride, nitrate, or car­bonate and calcined at 600° to expel HC1, IIN 03, or C02 and leave a residue of A120 3 and alkali sulphate, which is ground with CaC03 and C and fused to produce a mixture of alkali aluminate and CaS. A. R. P.

Obtaining products containing spinels. T. R. H aglund (B.P. 418,859, 14.9.33).—A mixture of chromite and bauxite with CaO p> twice the Si02 content of the charge is smelted with reducing agents to obtain ferrochromium and a 2Ca0,Si02 slag (I) in which the spinel (II), formed by the combination of the MgO and A120 3 in the charge, crystallises. On

exposure to the air (I) crumbles to a powder and can be separated from (II) by washing first with II20 and then with HC1. A. R. P.

Preparation of base-exchange materials. H. Spence, G. Osborne, and P. Spence & Sons, L td . (B.P. 418,632, 19.1.33).—Calcined kaolin or similar hydrated A1 silicate is leached -oath hot dil. mineral acid to remove a portion of the A120 3, washed with cold II20, graded, and washed with a cold dil. (5%) solution of NaOH at

30° until adsorption of Na20 ceases. A. R. P.Preparation of contact or adsorbent substances

[bauxite] and their application [in oil refining]. Burmah O i l Co , L td . From II. L. A l l a n (B.P. 416,711,13.12.32).—Bauxite (B) is roasted a t 400—600° and impregnated with 15% aq. A12(S04)3 or with substances, e.g., H2S04, S03, or S02 + 0 2, which produce A12(S04)3 (I) by "reaction with hot B, and the treated material is heated at about 440° to dehydrate (I). The product forms an efficient decoloriser for petroleum oils and the products obtained in cracking them. A. R. P.

Manufacture of pure chromium compounds [sulphate]. W. H ene (B.P. 418,714, 17.1.34. Ger,31.1.33).—Aq. Cr2(S04)3 containing FeS04 and produced by dissolution of ferrochromium in HaS04 is treated hot with Ca(OH)2 to neutralise the free acid, the CaS04 ppt. is removed, and the filtrate is diluted to 4—5 times its vol. with hot H 20 to ppt. basic Cr sulphate (I) which settles and filters readily and can be economically converted into Cr2(S04)3 or into Cr alum. The filtrate may be further neutralised to recover more of (I).

A. R P .Simultaneous production of salts of sexavalent

chromium and other oxygen compounds. H. D.E lkington. From B ozel-MatJstra Soc. I ndustr. de P rod. Chim . (B.P. 416,624, 21.12.33).—Mixtures of chromite with one or more of the following: rutile, ilmenite, bauxite, Mn ores, phosphate rock, are smelted with coke and silicate fluxes in an electric furnace to produce a complex ferro-alloy (I) containing Cr. (I) is finely powdered and digested with aq. NaOH, KOH, or K3P 0 4 in an autoclave through which 0 2 is passed, to produce solutions containing Cr04" salts with phosphates, manganates, etc. and Fe(0II)3 residues containing Ti02, Mn02, etc. The Na2Cr04 or K2Cr04 is recovered from the solutions by fractional crystallisation. A. R. P.

Manufacture of titanium oxide. I ntermetal Corp., Assces. of L. G. J enness (B.P. 420,105, 26.5.33. U.S., 17.6.32).—TiCl4 (I) is added to a solution of HC1 in such a manner that the (I) dehydrates the hydrated chloride first formed and forms a mixture of basic chlorides of Ti in the form of a granular powder con­taining 1—2 mols. of II20 of hydration per mol. of monobasic chloride. This powder is heated at 100° to give fluffy, white TiO,, but smaller particle sizes are obtainable by raising the temp, to 200—300°.

W. J. W.Preparation and use of titanium compounds.

H. Spence, S. F. W. Crundall, and P. Spence & Sons, L td . (B.P. 419,522,7.2.33).—Sol, difficultly hydrolysable TiiV compounds for use in tanning and mordanting are prepared by evaporation of solutions of a ri i phosphate in H 2C20 4 or Na H oxalate, or of solutions of another Ti

B ritish C hem ica l A b s tr a c ts—B .

148 C l . V I I I . — G l a s s : C e r a m ic s .

salt with a sol. phosphate and an alkali oxalate, lactate, or tartrate. A. R. P.

Hydrolysing titaniferous [sulphate] solutions.A. H. S t e v e n s . Prom S o u t h e r n M in e r a l P r o d u c ts Co r p . (B.P. 418,798, 22.3.34).—1Ti(S04)2 solution is passed continuously through a heat exchanger (I) of the parallel-flow type in which it is rapidly heated to hydrolysing temp, and maintained there for sufficient time for completion of hydrolysis, and is then discharged through a spray device into a cooling chamber. If desired, extenders, e.g., BaS04, are suspended in the solution prior to passing it into (I) so as to obtain a loaded pigment. A. R. P.

Treating sulphate solutions of thallium and cadmium. A m e r . S m e l t in g & R e f in in g Co. (B.P. 419,508, 23.3.34. U.S., 29.3.33).—Crude Cd-Tl flue dust is heated with H2S04, the solution evaporated, the residue calcined and leached with II20 in presence of CdS, and the resulting pure CdS04-T l2S04 solution electrolysed to deposit pure Cd until the C d: TI ratio reaches 9 :1 . Electrolysis is continued with new cathodes to deposit a Cd-Tl alloy, which is dissolved in H2S04 and the Cd pptd. with Na2C03, the TI in the filtrate being recovered by pptn. of T12S, dissolution of the ppt. in H 2S04, and electrolysis of the solution with a ferrosilicon anode. A . R . P.

Treatment of cyanide solutions [containing gold etc.]. T. E w a n , R. J. L em m o n , and I m p e r ia l Ch e m . I n d u s t r ie s , L t d . (B.P. 416,475, 15.3.33).—KCN solu­tions containing Au, Ag, and base metals, e.g., Cu, from leaching Au and Ag ores are treated with a neutral solution of CuCl in brine to ppt. all the CN', the ppt. is boiled with H2S04 and brine to distil ofi the IICN, which is collected in milk-of-CaO to form aq. Ca(CN)2 for re-use and to form CuCl solution (I) for the first step, and the insol. residue of AuCN, AgCl, and CuCNS is collected, washed, roasted, and leached with dil. H 2S 04 to leave Au and Ag powder and yield CuS04 solution which later is added to (I). The combined solution is reduced with S02 and neutralised with CaC03 to remove the Fe before being used again.

A. R. P.Transporting and using highly compressed

carbon dioxide in a solid form. G. E. H e y l (B.P. 420,044, 29.8.34).—The C02 is transported in the form of solid blocks, which a t their destination are put into laterally slit, hinged metallic or cardboard containers. These are inserted into steel cylinders, provided with -a valve, in which the C02 liquefies. 10—20% of MeBr may be mixed with the CO, before solidification.

W .J.W .Production of hydrogen peroxide. D e u t s . Go l d -

U. SlLBERSCHEIDEANSTALT VORM. R oESSLER, and L. H e SS(B.P. 419,245, 22.2.34. Addn. to B.P. 415,658; B , 1934, 961).—The distillation tube may be subjected to internal heating only by inserting eccentrically in its lower portion one or more heating tubes (T ). These may be provided with helical fillers (F ), enabling the heating medium to pass between the inner surface of T and the surface of F. W. J. W.

Manufacture of oxygen-generating or cooling substances. K. Ge r s o n (B.P. 414,210, 2.8.33).—0 2-

generating compositions for respirators are produced by mixing Na20 2 (100) with CC14 (4) and adding Na20 2,8H20 (8) and CuCl2,3Cu0,3H20 (2 pts.) to produce a moist, sandy product which can readily be pressed into tablets ; these are broken up to a coarse sand which is heated at 120° to produce a porous, coherent solid free from CC14. A. R. P.

Recovery of sulphur from sulphide ores. S. B.M cCl u s k e y (B.P. 417,276, 21.6.33).—The ore is roasted in a S02-a ir current (I) containing S02 11—12 and 0 2 6 • 7—5 ■ 4% and the gases are passed through hot coke to reduce about 75% of their S02 content to S, which is condensed and the remaining S02 absorbed in H 20. Aeration of the resulting solution affords (I) for the first stage. A. R. P.

Utilising the heat of furnace gases from pyrites burners. M e t a l l g e s . A.-G. (B.P. 419,499, 22.2.34. Ger, 9.3.33).—The gases leaving the furnace are caused to have a temp, of 800—1000° by using pyrites of fine grain and/or of quick-burning character and are used for the indirect heating of raw phosphates or super­phosphates, the gases being cooled to < 450°.

W. J. W.Recovery of sulphur from hydrogen sulphide.

G ir d l e r Co r p . (B.P. 419,479, 16.10.33. U.S., 15.10.32). —To remove H 2S from its gaseous mixtures, a solvent for S02 is circulated in a closed cycle and an absorbing agent for H2S in another closed cycle. The gaseous mixture containing H2S is passed through portions of both cycles to remove separate portions of H2S in each. H 2S is removed from the second cycle and burned to S02, this being added to the first cycle to form free S.

W. J. W.Recovery of sulphur dioxide from gas m ixtures.

A. M . Cl a r k , and I m p e r ia l Ch e m . I n d u s t r ie s , L t d . (B.P. 419,068, 3.5. and 27.9.33).—S02 is absorbed from roaster gases by circulation through a solution containing (NH4)H2P 0 4 (250), citric acid (100) neutralised with NH3, and (NH4)2S04 (100 g. per litre), and is regenerated by boiling the saturated solution, the H 2S04 which accumulates from oxidation of part of the S02 being removed by by-passing part of the solution through a tower in which it is saturated with S02 and treated with milk-of-CaO to ppt. CaS04. A somewhat similar procedure is claimed when the NH4 salts are replaced by Na salts in the absorbent liquor. A. R. P.

Separating solids from solution.—See I. Re­covering NH3 from wood-pulp liquor.—See V. Treating sulphide ores. Hydrogenation apparatus. Rust-preventing composition. Working up vanadi- ferous substances. Mg from magnesiferous materials.—See X. Metal salts of carboxylic acid s. Ti pigm ents.—See X III. Gas - producing m aterials.—See XIV. Fertilisers. Weedicides.— See XVI.

VIII.— GLASS ; CERAMICS.Constitution of glass. G. W. M o r e y (J. Amer.

Ceram. Soc, 1934, 17, 315—328).—No more is known about glass than that it is a liquid so much undercooled as to be practically rigid. Discontinuities in property- composition curves are not true indications of a change

B ritish C h em ica l A b s tr a c ts —B .C l . V III—G l a s s ; C e r a m ic s . 149

in constitution unless the properties are measured under equilibrium conditions. In the case of glasses such conditions are attained only after a long period of time, when it is found that the apparent discontinuities have disappeared. The evidence of the rate of volatilisation of molten glasses and the electrical conductivity and d of solid glasses which has been supposed to indicate the presence of silicate compounds is shown to be fallacious. The X-ray pattern of a molten silicate is distinct from that of the cryst. form and differs in its degree of definition. .X-Ray studies confirm that the glassy state is distinguished by a random, non-repeating, at. network. There is no evidence of the existence of a “ brittle ” and a viscous temp, range, nor is glass a fourth state of matter. J. A. S.

Viscosity and electrical conductivity of molten glasses. C. L. B abcock (J. Amer. Ceram. Soc., 1934, 17, 329—342).—A new type of concentric-cylinder viscosinieter is described which measures 7) and the electrical conductivity (p) simultaneously. The torque is measured by a precision-balance system. Measure­ments were made on commercial B 20 3, Na20-Ca0, PbO, and Na20 glasses in the viscous range 700—1400° (corresponding with tj 3—107 poises and p 0-3—103 ohms). Electrical measurements at about 400° were in good agreement with those of Turner. Generally the formula vj = aps does not hold below the viscous range, although one B 20 3 glass seems to be an exception. Log ti and log p as functions of l /T give straight lines in the solid region, becoming steeper in the annealing range and flattening out again at high temp. This anomaly is explained by the variation of the work function with temp, in the Lark-Horovitz equation. In all cases the work function for -q is several times > that of p, indicating that p depends on the binding forces between ions as well as on vj. J. A. S.

Cone-10 raw crystal glaze. H. T hiemecke (J. Amer. Ceram. Soc, 1934, 17, 359—362).—The compos­ition [0-16 K 20 0-43 MgO, 0-31 CaO, 0-08 ZnO, 0-02 BaO, 0-24 A1„03, 2-2 Si02 (e.g., felspar 35-0, whiting12-5, ZnO 2-5", BaC03 1-5; MgC03 14-5, ball clay 8-5, flint 25-5%)] was successfully applied to a typical body of the general composition felspar 32, ball clay 25, china clay 21, flint 22%. The effects of variations in glaze composition, colour additions, and firing schedule are described in detail. Optical tests indicated that the crystals were probably of the pyroxene group <Ca0,Mg0,2Si02). ' J. A. S.

White ground-coats [enamels]. J. D. T etrick (J. Amer. Ceram. Soc, 1934, 17, 349—356).—Good adherence was obtained on metal surfaces plated with Sb or NI, but the latter exhibited fishscaling. Zn caused blistering in the ground-coat (G) fire. Fe and Cu (except with Co G) developed poor adherence. Of the various etching agents, 12% H N03 (for 10 min.) was the only one to give good adherence. In order to produce good one-coat finish it is necessary to increase the accessory opacifiers of the white G. Addition of 1% of Sb20 3 to G promotes adherence but causes reboiling. The fluidity of the enamel should be high in order to decrease reboiling and to produce a smooth finish on an etched surface. J. A. S.

Reboiling of sheet-iron ground-coat enamels.A. I. Andrews and R. E. Mullady (J. Amer. Ceram. Soc, 1934, 17, 346—348).—The influences of the base metal, its thickness and state of strain, the furnace atm., and cooling rate are described. The cooling rate is closely related to reboiling. J. A. S.

Viscosity and reboiling of blue ground-coats [enamels]. R. R. D anielson and J. D. Tetrick (J. Amer. Ceram. Soc, 1934, 17, 343—345).—Defects due to reboiling may be minimised by a suitably low viscosity. Staley’s “ refractory val.” (RV) which is a calculation of the fusibility of an enamel from the factors of its components, was found to be capable of replacing elaborate fusibility tests. The calc. R V agreed well with the “ fusion-block ’’ test. (Cf. B , 1933, 387.)

J. A. S.An undescribed variety of flint clay. S. L.

Galpin and J. P. N olting, ju n . (J. Amer. Ceram. Soc, 1934, 17, 357—359).—The physical, chemical, mineral- ogical, and working properties of a northern West Virginian flint clay are described. J. A. S.

Chrome corundum. F. W. P reston (J. Amer. Ceram. Soc, 1934, 17, 356—357).—If K2Cr20 7 is melted in a fireclay crucible at about 1480° crystals of a solid solution of Cr20 3 in A120 3 are formed. The same substance may give trouble in the melting of glasses in which Cr20 3 is introduced as R 2Cr20 7, especially if local concn. on the refractory is not avoided. J. A. S.

E rratum .— On page 361, col. 1, line 33 of “ B ” abstracts, 1934, for V. T. N akai read V. T. N akai.

Heat transfer.—See I. Removing tar etc. from glass.—See II. [Refractories for] resistance furnace.—See XI.

See also A , Ja n , 36, Ternary S i0 2-N a20 -A I20 3 glasses.

P atents.Recuperative glass-m elting tanks. P. L. Geer

(B.P. 420,541, 10.7.33).—The heating flames after passing concurrent with the glass are turned back through a flue above the crown to a distributing chamber and thence downwards through vertical tubes of the recuperator (R) to a slag chamber at the bottom. The air is passed horizontally through R. B. M. V.

Production of a luminescent glass. M , H , and M. F ischer (Glaswerk G. F ischer) (B.P. 421,142,19.12.33. Ger, 19.12.32. Addn. to B.P. 415,536 ; B , 1934, 962).—The prior process is extended to the use of the oxides or selenides of Ca, Sr, Ba, or Zn. J. A. S.

Production of surface-decorated glass. P ilking- ton B ros, L td . From Vitrolite Co. (B.P. 420,837,10.6.33).—Opaque glass, or glass with a non-reflecting backing, has its non-dispersive (polished) surface differentially etched (by sand-blasting) so that the design appears to be in relief. Tinted glasses may be used to give a colour-shading effect. The prep, and use of suitable stencils is described. J. A. S.

Manufacture of vitreous compositions with mica base. Soc. Anon, des Manuf. des Glaces et P rod. Chim . de St .-Gobain, Chauny et Cirey (B.P. 418,488,20.3.34. F r , 11.4. and 17.11.33).—A mixture of finely-divided biotite or phlogopite with a readily

B ritish C hem ical A b s tr a c ts—B .

150 Cl. IX .— B u i l d i n g M a t e r i a l s . Cl. X.— M e t a l s ; M e t a l l u r g y , i n c l u d i n g E l e c t r o -M e t a l l u r g y .

fusible vitreous flux (F) is heated to the softening point of F and pressed into the shape of electrical insulators in metal moulds heated at 400°. F is made by fritting Na3AlF6 (10), Si02 (10), Pb30 4 (30), felspar (15), and H3B03 (35%); its softening point is 420°. A. R. P.

Production of magnesite blocks of high resist­ance to changes of temperature. Oe s t e r r . A m e r - ik a n . M a g n e s it A.-G. (B.P. 418,580, 28.2.33. Austr,2.3.32).—Ground magnesite is separated into 3 fractions, v iz, (A) 0—100 fi, (B) 100—1000 ¡j., and (G) 1000— 3000 pi, and these are mixed in the proportion 20—40 :15—25 : 35—65 with about 2—6% of A120 3 or a corresponding amount of bauxite, fireclay, or kaolin. The mixture is briquetted a t 200—1000 kg./sq. in. and the bricks are fired at 1400—1600°. A. R. P.

Manufacture of abrasive smoothing or polishing cloths, paper, etc. D e u t s . Go l d - tr. S il b e r s c h e id e - a n s t a l t v o r m . R o e s s l e r (B.P. 420,912, 6.6.33. Ger,22.6.32).—The abrasive particles are bound to the surface by a spongy layer of caoutchouc. In addition to the abrasive, the latex dispersion contains filling and vulcanising agents and a material [e.g., (NH,)2C0 3, H20 2, etc.] which evolves gas during the hardening process and so produces sponginess. The rate of gas evolution may be controlled by catalysts (Mn02).

J. A. S.Products from spinels.—See VII.

IX .— BUILDING MATERIALS.Constitution of Portland cement clinker. B.

T a v a s c i (Giorn. Chim. Ind. Appl, 1934, 16, 538— 552). —Microscopical examination, using various etching solutions and comparing directly with known synthetic compounds, indicates that the clinker contains (1) alite, 3CaO,SiOa ; (2) belite, 2Ca0,Si02, which may bepresent in a- and j3-forms and as an intermediate form analogous to martensite ; (3) celite, an intimate mixture of 3Ca0,Al20 3 and 4Ca0,A]20 3,Ee„03 ; and (4) CaO.

D. R. D.Reaction of calcium sulphate with the com ­

ponents of clay. J. Z a w a d z k i and Z . S o b ie r a j (Przemysł Chem, 1934, 18 , 668—676).—Portland cement (I) of good quality, and not containing CaS or CaS04, can be obtained by firing a mixture of CaS04, clay, and coke (6%), under conditions analogous to those applied to the production of (I) from CaC03, but at a higher initial temp. (1100—1200°). R. T.

Heat of setting of cement. W. S w ie n t o s ł a w s k i and S. R o s iń s k i (Przemyśl Chem, 1934,18, 590—594). —The rate of evolution of heat on mixing cement with H aO attains a max. val. after a time characteristic of a given cement (8—15 hr.). R . T .

Fused cement. R. P e t t e n a t i (L’Ind. Chimica, 1934, 9, 1484—1488).—The manufacture of “ fused cement ” by heating bauxite with Ca(OII)2 in an electric furnace is described. The properties of such cements are tabulated. D. R. D.

Painting and preservation of cement and con­crete. G. Genin (Peint. Pig. Ver, 1934,11, 241—245). —The principal modes of protecting and decorating cement surfaces are reviewed. G. H. C.

Experimental kiln for air-flow investigations [in tim ber seasoning]. W. L. G r e e n h il l (J. Counc. Sci. Ind. R es, Australia, 1934-, 7, 256—257).—Structural details are given. A. G . P.

Brittle heart in Australian tim bers : pre­lim inary study. H. E. D adswell and I. L anglands (J. Counc. Sci. Ind. R es, Australia, 1934, 7, 190—196). —Affected wood has a greater cellulose : lignin ratio,

■ and H N 03-KC103 treatment reveals many broken fibres. A. G. P.

Portland cement from gypsum .—See VII. Paint­ing new wood.—See X III.

See also A , J a n , 36, System C a0-A l20 3- S i0 2* 49, Effect of fluorides on thermal synthesis of Ca aluminates and silicates. 50, Hydrothermal syn­thesis of Ca hydrosilicate.

P a t e n t s .

Manufacture of thermal- and sound-insulating material. L. T. H allStt (B.P. 421,077, 5.9.33).— See U.S.P. 1,925,142 ; B , 1934, 528.

Paving, floor, and like surface-covering materials composed of soft or hard rubber. Soc. I t a l . P ir e l l i (B .P . 421,238, 24.3.34. Italy, 22.11.33).

Rotary kilns.—See I. Asphalt dispersions.—SeeII. Washable wallpaper.—See V. Coating base materials with metal .—See X. Waterproof coatings [for concrete].—See X III.

X .— METALS ; M ETA LLU R G Y ; INCLUDING ELECTRO-METALLURGY.

Direct and indirect reduction in the blast furnace.I . B o h ji (Jernkontorets Ann, 1934, 114, 277—339).— Data are recorded for the relative ease of reduction of various types of ore, sinters, and briquettes by CO (CO 30, H 2 0-4, N2 69-6%) under various operating conditions. “ Ci i . A b s . (e)

Operation of a Minette blast furnace with and without scrap m etal. M. S t e f f e s (Stahl u. Eisen, 1935, 55, 17—20).—Results for the operation of a largo Minette blast furnace producing 225—250 tons of Bessemer pig Fe per 24 hr. are given. Coke consump­tion, amount, and calorific val. of blast-furnace gas produced, and composition of slag for varying propor­tions of scrap in the charge are tabulated. A coke consumption of 288-6 kg. per ton of pig Fe made from scrap is the average of numerous observations. Whilst the amount of blast-furnace gas decreases with increase of scrap in the charge, the calorific val. of the gas is not greatly affected. W. P. R.

High-frequency induction furnace in the m etall­urgical research laboratory. W. W. S t e v e n s o n (Ind. Chem, 1934, 10, 486-—490).—The production of18-lb. samples of steels in a 35 kv.-amp. induction furnace for physical and chemical examination is de­scribed. The properties of these samples agree very closely with those of similar steels produced on the large scale. D. K. M.

Recent developments in cast iron. W. West (Metallurgia, 1934, 11, 54—56).—A review. Mo addi

B ritish C hem ical A b s tr a c ts—B .Cl. X.—M e t a l s ; M e t a l l u r g y , in c l u d i n g E l e c t r o -M e t a l l u r g y . 151

tions to cast Fe, with or without 0-3% Cr, increase tensile strength both at room temp, and 500°. The effect is maximal with 0 ■ 85% Mo, and is unaccompanied by any marked change in elongation. B. H. B.

A llo y - iro n c a s tin g s . Anon. (Metallurgia, 1934, 11,39—41).—Developments in the production of such castings are reviewed. B- H. B.

Determination of graphitisation rates in white cast iron. W. A. Pennington and W. H. J ennings (Trans. Amer. Soc. Met., 1934, 22, 751—765).—The quant, effect of Mn (0-2—5-0%) and combined effect of Mn and W (Mn 0 -88—1-59, W 0-87—4-91%) on the rate of graphitisation (£?) of white cast Fe a t 925° have been determined. Up to 1% of Mn has little effect, but 1—3% strongly retards G. W in combination with 1% of Mn retards the first stage of G slightly, but with2-5% of Mn it accelerates the process. White cast Fe is graphitised much more quickiy a t 925° by continuous than by interrupted heating. , W. P. 11.

Solidification of steel in ingot moulds. L. H.Nelson (Trans. Amer. Soc. Met, 1934, 2 2 ,193—220).— Data for the rate of solidification of steel in moulds are recorded and discussed. W. P. R.

Quenching of steel cylinders. II. Scott (Trans. Amer. Soc. Met, 1934, 22, 68—94).—To determine the quenching rate two consts. must be known, viz, (a) the difiusivity (jD), a characteristic of the steel; and (b) the quenching factor (Q), a characteristic of the quenching bath. D for plain C steels was estimated in the austinitic condition, since the cooling rate (C) while the steel is in this condition determines the end-products of the quench. I t is shown that C a t the centre of a long cylinder is indicative of the max. size which can be fully hardened. The chief advantage of a bath with a high Q is to ensure uniform shallow hardening in a fine-grained steel. W. P. R.

Quenching steel in hot lead. T. P. H ughes and R. L. D owdell (Trans. Amer. Soc. Met, 1934, 22, 737—750).—The high internal stresses and danger of formation of cracks when steel is hardened by quenching in H aO may be minimised by quenching in hot Pb. A consistent and sequential series of mechanical properties results from quenching in Pb a t varying temp.

W. P. R.Effect of water vapour on the surface decarburis-

ation of steel by hydrogen with certain develop­m ents in gas purification. C. R. Austin (Trans. Amer. Soc. Met, 1934, 22, 31—58).—Dry H2 and H2 with 10 mg. of H 20 per cu. ft. do not decarburise the surface of a plain 1 -0% C steel or l-42% .Cr steel. Increase in the H 20 content of the H2 is accompanied by a rapid increase in the decarburising power of the gas at 800°. In order to test that the H2 was free from 0 2 the gas was passed over a bright, stainless- steel strip heated a t 700°. A green tarnish appeared on the surface if the II2 contained > 1—2 p.p.m. of 0 2.

W. P. R.Classification of a-iron-nitrogen and a-iron-

carbon as age-hardening alloys. J. L. Burns (Amer. Inst. Min. Met. E ng, Tech. Publ. 556, 1934, 20 pp.).—A review and crit. discussion. Gh . Abs. (e)

Treatment of steel for permanent m agnets.R. L. D o w d e l l (Trans. Amer. Soc. M et, 1934, 22,19—27).—To impart the greatest stability to the steel, regardless of its composition, it is tempered for 12 hr. at 100° in the non-magnctised condition, magnetised, tempered until about 5% of magnetic induction is lost, and finally placed in a reversed demagnetising field until a further 5% is lost. Details of various treatments and ageing characteristics over a period of 10 years aregiven. W. P. R.

Steels with up to 7% chromium. S. M. N orwood (Met. Progress, 1934, 26, No. 3, 17—21).—A review of properties and uses of steels containing Cr, Mo, W, and Ti. Gh ; Ab s. (e)

Structure and constitution of an alloy steel.0. W. E llis (Trans. Amer. Soc. M et, 1934, 22, 139— 183).—A Widmannstatten structure is obtained in an alloy steel containing 0-33% C, 0-69% Mn, 1-30% Ni, and 0-73% Cr if the time of cooling between 850° and 350° lies between two fairly wide limits. The rate of cooling which produces this structure depends partly on the max. temp, to which the steel is heated previous to quenching. Thus the rate for a max. temp. < 915° is only J that for a max. temp. 975°. rIhe steel is particularly prone to excessive grain growth at 950°. An analysis of the large no. of cooling rates employed indicates that the steel exhibits, under certain condi­tions, 4 crit. points, designated Ar3', Ar3", Arl', and A rl". At the Ar3' temp, part of the y-solid solution transforms into oc-solid solution, at A rl' part of the y transforms into a + FesC, a t Ar3" part of the y transforms into needle-shaped a-solution, and a t A rl" the ysolid solution changes into “ conglomerate."’ The alternating needles of a and interstitial conglomerate form the Widmannstatten structure. W. P. R.

Determination of sm all amounts of chromium in steel. N. Collari (Annali Chim. Appl, 1934, 24, 487—493).—A 10-g. sample is dissolved in 110 c.c. of 10% H aS04. After dilution with 100 c.c. of boiling HaO, 8% NaHCOg solution is run in from a burette, with const, stirring, until a permanent ppt. forms, 4 c.c. in excess being then added. The liquid is boiled for a few sec, allowed to settle, and filtered as quickly as possible ; the residue is washed 2—3 times with hot H20 and dissolved in 10 c.c. of hot 1 :1 HC1, added dropwise. Filtrate and washings are stirred well with 30 c.c. of 30% KOH solution and a little saturated B r-H 20, left to settle on a H20-bath, filtered, and washed with hot II20. The filtrate is treated with a little NH3, conc. if necessary, made up to 100 c.c, and compared colorimetrically with K 2Cr20 7 solution.

T. H. P.Effect of thermal stresses on austenite. H. P.

N ie lse n and R. L. D o w d e ll (Trans. Amer. Soc. Met, 1934, 2 2 , 810—832).—Thermal stresses are not essential for the austenite (A ) -> martensite transformation. The transformation may be initiated by the instability of A Ch. Abs. (e)

X-Ray study of the transition of austenite into martensite during the working process. G-. V.D avuidov (J . Tech. Phys, U.S.S.R, 1934, 4 , 544—546). —Two steels (C l -2, Mn 3 % ; and C 1, Mn 1 0 /,) on

B ritish C hem ica l A b s tr a c ts—B .

152 Cl. X.— M e t a l s ; M e t a l l u r g y , i n c l u d i n g E l e c t r o -M e t a l l u r g y .

quenching from 1100° in H20 gave both martensite (M) and austenite (A). With oil-quenclnng only A was formed. Dynamic deformation (shock) caused con­version of A into M ; static deformation did not.

Ch . A b s . (e)Habits and laws of decomposition of supercooled

solutions, w ith special regard to austenite. G. B.U pton (Trans. Amer. Soc. Metals, 1934,22 , 690—719).— The new conception that a phase may be defined as a space lattice is challenged as it does not differentiate between the (3- and fi-prime solid solution in brasses. The difference between a- and ¡3-Fe is one of “ order ” and “ disorder ” in the arrangement of atoms in the space lattice or of the electrons within or surrounding the atoms. On the assumption that a- and (3-Fe are different phases, a modified equilibrium diagram for the Fe-Si diagram is put forward. The superheating and supercooling lag of the A3 point in Fe with varying rates of change of temp, oc V(rate of change of temp.). By plotting the beginning of the Ar3 and the Ac3 points with varying rates of cooling and heating, the true A3 point is obtained. The lag of pearlite (P) formation is that of a and of Fe3C, with the result that the composition of P is not fixed, but varies with different rates of cooling. This explains the increase in the pearlitic areas in C steels cooled a t increasing rates. The different habits of supercooling for the stable Fe-graphite and the metastable Fe-Fe3C eutectoid explain why P is usually obtained in steels and cast irons. W. P. R.

Composition and critical temperature of pearlite containing 1% of silicon. H. E. S chowalter and W. W. D elammatter [with H. A. Schwartz] (Trans. Amer. Soc. Met., 1934, 2 2 , 120—132).—A series of steels containing approx. 1% of Si with C varying from 0-14 to 0-76% were cooled at varying rates. The % pearlite (P) in.the alloys was determined by means of an inter­cept planimeter. The C content of the eutectoid was calc, from the known C content of the alloy and % P present. Contrary to previous work, the results show that 1% of Si slightly raises the C content of the meta­stable eutectoid, but the % C in the alloy is also a factor affecting the final C content of P . 1% of Si raises the A1 point 20—40°. W. P. R.

Periodic hardness fluctuations induced in m etals by mechanical, thermal, and magnetic disturb­ances. E. G. H erbert (Engineering, 1934, 198, 631—632).—Thin beams or wires of steel (C 0-64, Mn 0-8%) and Ni, supported on knife-edges, were loaded within the elastic limit and a continuous record was made of the deflection. The results confirm earlier experiments on fluctuation of pendulum hardness and suggest variability of modulus of elasticity as the cause of hardness fluctuations. E. H . B.

Factors affecting the physical properties and corrosion-resistance of 18-8 chromium-nickel steel wire. W . H. W ills and J. K. F indley (Trans. Amer. Soc. M et, 1934, 22, 1—18).—The physical properties and corrosion-resistance of 18-8 Cr-Ni steel with from 0-15 to 0 • 20% C are not improved by heating a t 820° for a short time, but after heating a t this temp, for 72-—140 hr. the carbides are agglomerated and the

steel is then not so susceptible to corrosion after heating a t the temp, of carbide pptn. The addition of 0-5—1-0% of Ti rcduces the susceptibility to intergranular corrosion after heating a t 650° and the physical proper­ties of the Ti steel wire are only slightly worse than those of the 18-8 Cr-Ni steel with high C content.

W. P. R.Kernel roasting [of chalcopyrite]. T. K im u r a

(J. Min. Inst. Japan, 1932, 48, 1275—1288).—The mechanism of Cu enrichment in the kernel during roasting was studied. Ch . Abs. (e)

M agnesium-cliromium as a deoxidiser of copper.C. Vickers (Metallurgia, 1934, 10, 43).—0-05% of Cr and 0-025% of Mg, both in the form of approx. 10% alloys with Cu, when added to molten Cu in such a manner that they are immediately immersed, form excellent deoxidisers, the metal pouring easily and yielding bright and clean castings. Satisfactory results are also obtained with red and yellow brass, gunmetal, and other common alloys. Combined Mg-Cr-Cu alloys are difficult to prepare as they tend to oxidise rapidly during melting. H. F. G.

Age-hardening characteristics of som e copper- nickel-silicon alloys. B. W. Gonser and L. R. v a n Wer t (Met. & Alloys, 1934, 5 , 251—255, 281—283).— A detailed examination has been made of the hardening of 3 alloys containing (a ) 2-08, (b) 2-95, and (c) 5-07% Ni -j- Si in the ratio Ni2Si, (c) containing also 5-31% Al. After quenching from > 700° alloys are hardened by treatment at 425—550°. The max. hardness (H ) is attained progressively more rapidly as the ageing temp, is raised. After attainment of max. 11, softening occurs. The max. H decreases with rise in ageing temp. Effects of variations in solution anneal, time and tem p, quenching medium, of overageing, of repeated ageing and annealing cycles, and of slow cooling from temp, of solution treatment are dealt with in detail. Cold-working after quenching accelerates both the hardening and softening stages of the ageing and increases the max. H. Electrical conductivity measure­ments and dilatometric, metallograpliic, and .X-ray investigations have indicated a constitutional change between 500° and 700° (cf. A , 1933, 455).

E. H. B.Bonding strength of babbitt to steel and bronze.

E. G. Soash (Met. & Alloys, 1934, 5, 268).—Sn-base bearing metal (Sn 83, Cu 9£, Sb 7 |% ) was cast between steel or bronze rods. Tensile tests showed better contact with bronze and indicated the most suitable technique of cleaning, fluxing, tinning, and babbitting.

E. H. B.Type m etals. H. V. White (Metal Progress, 1934,

2 6 , 17— 21).—Alloys suitable for type metals all fall within the composition range Sn 3—14, Sb 3—24%, remainder Pb. Linotype metal is a mixture of the eutectics Pb-Sb (I) and Pb-Sn ( I I ) ; electrotype is a mixture of (I) -(- (II) -f- excess Pb ; stereotype and hard foundry metals consist of (I) + (II) + excess of Sb and Sn. The chief property which determines the capability of the metal to reproduce fine detail is a low surface tension and not solidification expansion as was formerly supposed. W. P. R.

B ritish C hem ica l A b s tr a c ts—B .C l . X — M e t a l s ; M e t a l l u r g y , i n c l u d i n g E l e c t r o -M e t a l l u r g y . 153

Analysis of elektron [metal]. U. Ivo and M.Giuseppina (L’Ind. Cliimica, 1934, 9, 1476—1480).— The alloy is treated with UNO., (d l -2). Sn is deter­mined in the insol. portion by heating with N II4C1, and Si by heating with HF. Cu and Pb in the solution are determined eleetrolytically. On subsequent addition of conc. H2S04 the sol. Si is pptd. and weighed as Si02. The filtrate is neutralised (to tropaaolin) with aq. NH3, and Zn pptd. as ZnS and weighed as ZnO. The ZnS must be washed with acidified aq. (NH4)2S04 to remove A1 and Mg. A1 is pptd. as A1(0H)3 by adding aq. NII3 until the end-point for bromothymol-blue is reached. The Al(OII)3 is washed with H20 containing a little NII4N03 and NTI3 to remove Mg, and weighed as A120 3. In order to determine Fe, another sample is dissolved in HC1. Group II metals are pptd. with H2S, and the Fe is determined iodometrically. Mn is oxidised to HMn04 by means of (NH4)2S20 8 and determined colorimetrically. Ca is determined by Stolberg’s method (A, 1904, ii, 591). Mg is determined by difference.

D. R. D.Silver [equipment] and the corrosion problem.

B. A. R ogeks (Chem. Met. E ng, 1934,41, 631—633).— A survey is made of some further applications of Ag and of Ag-lined equipment (cf. B , 1934, 1106). Three kinds of linings are considered, v iz, those not per­manently attached to the outer wall, electrodeposited linings, and those forming duplex metal walls. The properties of Ag are discussed in relation to their significance in plant construction, and methods of joining Ag or composite Ag and base-metal parts are examined. D. K. M.

Manganese ores discovered at the sources of the Czeremosz [S.E. Poland]. J. Tokarski (Przemysł Chem, 1934, 18, 594—598).—The deposits, amounting to approx. 107 tons and containing 30—40% Mn, consist of l'hodochrosite 62, rhodonite 16, Si02 9-6, CaC03 5-4, oxides of Fe and Mn 7-1%. R. T.

Influence of rate of shear on shearing strength of lead. J. J amieson (Trans. Amer. Soc. Mech. Eng, 1934, 56 , 579—582).—The shear stress of Pb varies from 1310 lb./sq. in. for a velocity of shear (7) of 0-0135 rad./in./sec. to 2875 lb./sq. in. for V = 2S75 rad./in./sec. At low speeds of deformation Pb has a definite yield point. An equation is given covering the range of deformation speeds investigated. W. P. R.

Allowable working stresses under impact. N. N. D a v i d e n k o f f (Trans. Amer. Soc. Mech. Eng, 1934, 56, 97—107).—The tensile strength and especially the yield point are higher under impact than under static tests. Variations in test conditions may cause a ductilc material to break in a brittle manner. Fe and steel are brittle a t low tem p, but Cu, Al, and tlieir alloys are ductile, whilst duralumin shows an increased ductility at low temp. W. P. R.

Premature precipitation in supersaturated solid solutions [of m etals]. J. L. B urns (Trans. Amer. Soc. M et, 1934, 22 , 728—736).—If a supersaturated solid solution is plastically deformed immediately after ■quenching from the temp, of max. solubility (t), or if a certain crit. rate of cooling from t is used, then (a) ageing commences earlier, (b) there is no incubation

period, (c) the final hardening will usually be less. Plastic deformation does not increase rate of hardening, but merely causes hardening to start earlier.

W. P. R.Uniform hardening of large bearing races.

B. K jerrm an and I. Bohm (Metal Progress, 1934, 26, 27—31).—In order to avoid soft spots on the surface of large bearing races (B) made from a steel containing C 1, Cr 1-5, Mn 0-3, Si 0-3%, B should be heated in a reducing a tm , during which time surface decarburis- ation occurs with only slight scaling. The atm. is then made oxidising by admitting air, and the decarburised layer is oxidised. The thin scale thus formed is brittle and easily falls off in quenching. W. P. R.

X-Ray inspection of high-alloy castings. F. K.Ziegler and D. W. B owi.and (Metal Progress, 1934, 26, 22—26).—The difficulties of interpretation ofX-ray photographs of castings are emphasised. The films do not show uniform density as do those of wrought metal, owing to the inherent variation in cross-section of cast products. W. P • R-

Ageing of m etals and alloys. A. Sauveur (Trans. Amer. Soc. M et, 1934, 22 , 97—113).—Metals may age at or above room temp, after quenching, or during quenching, or during cold-work deformation, or after deformation. The hardening of steel by quenching is an example of ageing during quenching, and martensite can be considered as a fully aged constituent resulting from rapid carbide pptn. from an excessively super­saturated solution of carbon in a-Fe. N2 plays a part in the ageing of steel after quenching, and the max. influence occurs when Fe contains 0-07% N. The role of 0 2 in the ageing of Fe and steel is somewhat uncertain, partly owing to the difficulties in determining the 0 content of a steel. The amount of ageing increases with the amount of free ferrite. W. P. R.

Metals and alloys in the pulp and paper industry.J. D. Miller (Met, & Alloys, 1934, 5, 263—267).—The manufacture of paper from wood is described, with special reference to the metallurgical requirements of the process equipment. E. H. B.

Use of vapour-phase cracked gases for welding and cutting m etal. L. A. P otolovski and P. Z. Anfinogenov (Azerbaid. Neft. Khoz, 1933, No. 8, 96—102).—Welding with a gas containing 50% of C2II4 gave satisfactory strength and metallographic structure of the seam. Ch. Abs. (e)

Cooling and lubrication during metal-working.R. P lücker (Allgem. Oel- u. Fett-Ztg, 1934, 31 ; Mineralöle, 7, 499—505).—The requirements for, and selection of, the most suitable cutting and boring oils for use in metal-working are discussed. E. L.

Performance of cutting fluids when sawing various m etals. 0. W. B oston and C. E. K raus (Trans. Amer. Soc. Mech. E ng, 1934, 56, 527—531).— The influence of aq. solutions of sol. oil, lard oil, light and heavy mineral oils', 5% solution of oleic acid in mineral oil, and sulphurised mineral (I) and lard oils on the saving of various ferrous and non-ferrous metals has been determined. (I) gave the best performance,

B ritish C hem ica l A b s tr a c ts — B .

C l . X .— M e t a l s ; M e t a l l u r g y , i n c l u d i n g E l e o t r o -M e t a l l u r g y ' .

but the influence of all the fluids was least in the case of Cu and Al. W. P. R.

Cleaning of m etals. VI. Degreasing by means of organic solvents. S. W e r n ic k (Ind. Chem, 1934, 10, 479—481 ; cf. B , 1934, 1062).—The removal of grease and polishing powder from metals by C2HC13 is described and suitable plant illustrated. D. K. M.

Detection and identification of m etallic particles in manufactured products. H. C. L o ckw ood (Analyst, 1934, 59, 812—814).—Particles of Sn, Pb, solder, Fe, Ni, Ilg, Cu, brass, Cr, Al, and Zn are detected and identified by their behaviour when exposed on a microscope slide to the action of acid fumes, aq. AuCl3 and AgN03, and in a magnetic field. E. C. S.

Why do som e m etals resist oxidation ? Iv.H f .m d l i io f e r and B. M. L a r s e n (Met. Progress, 1934, 26, No. 3, 34—37).—A discussion. C h. A b s. (e)

Corrosion investigations. W . W i e d e r i i o l t (Chem.- Z tg, 1935, 59, 25—28).—A review.

Metallography of light-m etal alloys. A. B l u jie x - t iia l (Metallurgia, 1934, 10, 83—85).—Details are given of the prep, grinding, polishing, and etching of cast Al and die-casting electron specimens for photographical examination. H. F. 6 .

Aluminium alloys and improved methods of manufacture. W. C. D e v e r e u x (Metallurgia, 1934, H i 49—-52).—In casting Al alloys, different feeding methods are required by each alloy. The most suitable feeding and chilling technique and pouring temp, should be investigated for each type of casting. Age-hardening alloys which require a high-temp. thermal treatment are not recommended for large and intricate castings. Repeated flux treatments, though removing unsound­ness, may produce coarse grain. For forging, ingots require equi-axed and, preferably, fine grain. Excessive grain growth must be guarded against in forging extruded bar. E. H. B.

Zinc electrodeposition : deposition from am m on­ium sulphate-zinc baths. R . R. R o g e r s and E. B lo o m , J u n . (Trans. Electrochem. Soc, 1935, 67, 65— 75).—The concn. range for electrodeposition of Zn from aq. mixtures of ZnSO.j, ZnO, (NH4)2S04, H2S04, and aq. NH3 which gave no ppt. has been determined at 0—90° except for high concns. of aq. NH3, for which the temp, was 40°. The anodes for acid, neutral, and alkaline solutions were, respectively, Pb, Zn, and Fe, except for high concns. of aq. NH3, for which P t was used ; a Ni cathode was used throughout. Resuite are expressed on a Zn-NII4-S 0 4 ternary diagram, the use of which is discussed. The effect of c.d. and temp, on the appearance of the deposit has been studied for 8 typical baths, the composition Zn 9-5, S04 42-4, and NH4 48-1% being superior to all others under the most favourable conditions of temp, and c.d.

R .S .B . -Effect of germanium in the electrolysis of zinc

sulphate solutions. P. G u a r e s c h i (L’Ind. Chimica, 1934, 9, 1466—1476; cf. B.j 1933, 751).—When aqi ZnS04 containing traces of Ge is electrolysed the deposit of Zn suffers considerable corrosion. The effect is reduced by addition of CaCN^ C5H5N, N(C2H4-OH)3,

and urea, and by increasing the c.d. H 20 2 and KMn04 have little effect. Addition of too high a concn. of basic N compounds produces corrosion of a different type. In the case of (NH4)2S04, this corrosion was shown to occur even in absence of Ge. D. R. D.

Regulation of the bath solution (dilute oxalic acid solution) for electrolytic oxidation of aluminium. A. Mtyata and M. T akei (Bull. Inst. Phys. Chem. R es, Japan, 1934, 13, 1285—1298).— The amounts of H2C20 4 required to correct for deterior­ation of electrolyte baths in the anodic process for Al have been determined. For 2% solution io = 2-0 — 0 -36Lp + 0 -546j»2 — 0-08707y3 (where w = [II'] after replenishing, in g. of H2C20 4,2H20 per 100 c.c, p = [C20 4"j — [H'] in g./lOO c.c.). The vals of p and [H‘] are determined by titra tion ; w can then be calc, and an amount of acid w — f H '] added. For 3 and 4% solutions, w = 3-0 — 0-823^3 + 0-784|>2 — 0-1187j>s, and w = 4-0 — 0-556j> + 0-718p2 — 0-1146i?3, respectively. R. S. B.

Inactive state [due] to the formation of anodic film of aluminium and its application to the prevention of corrosion. A. M i y a ta (Bull. Inst. Phys. Chem. Res, Japan, 1934, 13, 1299—1327).—On dipping in alkali and heating in high-pressure steam Al develops an inactive surface of cryst. A120 3,H20 which withstands the attack of alkali and org. acids, and is superior to the film of the ordinary anodic process. The treatment is best applied after formation of a thick anodic film. R. S. B.

Heat transfer.—See I. Slags from slag-tap fur­naces. Metallurgical coke.—See II. Corrosion of m etals by dyes.—See IV. Ground-coat enam els. —See VIII. Resistance furnaces. Magnetic m ater­ials.—See XI. Sediments in EtOH reservoirs.— See XVIII. Spectral reflexion density of white m etals.—See XXI.

See also A , J a n , 22, System s Na-Cs, Cu-Ga, and Cu-In. 23, System s Cu-Pb, Pr-Au, Zn-Mn, Zn-Co, Zn-Ni, Al-Fe, Sn-Mn, Sn-Co, M n-Si, Ni-Cu, Li-Pb, Li-Sn, Fe-Ni-M o, and Ag-Cu. p-Al bronze. C solubility of Fe-Cr-Si alloys. Heterogeneity [in Fe-Ni-Cr-C alloys]. 25, Diffu­sion of gases through m etals. 35, Reduction of m ixtures of Fe20 3 and other oxides. Slag system s. 41, Effect of Os and air on m etals. 45, Electro­m etallurgy of Al. Effect of oxidising agents on N i solutions. 46, Prep, of colloidal solutions by silent electric discharge. 52, Pt-black. 56, Deter­m ining P 0 4"' [P in steels], Au, Pt, and Ir. 59, Measuring d changes in m etals.

P a t e n t s .:

Rotary or sem i-rotary furnaces for m elting m etals. J. W a t so n (B.P. 420,560, 1.2.34).—The melting chamber is parabolic barrel-shaped and is provided with gas offtakes a t each end, within which are burners so inclined that the flames impinge on the wall a t the max. diam , on opposite sides from each end. The tapping spout is also a t the largest diam.

B. M. V.

B ritish C h em ica l A b s tr a c ts— B .Cl. X .— M e t a l s ; M e t a l l u r g y , i n c l u d i n g E l e c t r o -M e t a l l u r g y . 155

Refining of metals [steel, nickel, copper, tin, and lead]. G. N. K irsebom, and Calloy, L td . (B.P. 416,789, 18.3.33).—0 and S are removed from steel, Cu, and Ni by addition of a 20% Ca-Al alloy (I) to the molten metal. Addition of (I) to molten Sn containing small quantities of Cu, Sb, As, Bi, and Pb causes all these impurities to rise as a scum to the surface. A Ca-Al-Zn alloy may be used for removing Au, Ag, and Bi from Pb in one operation. A. R. P .

Production of ferrochromium free from carbon.N orsk IIydro-E lekteisk K vaelstof-A. S. (B.P. 418,560, 21.2.34. Norw, 26.4.33).—CrN and sponge Ee free from C are melted together in an inert atm. or in vac , whereby N2 is expelled and a pure Cr-Ee alloy produced. A. R. P .

Chromium steels [free from inter crystalline corrosion]. R. E. E llis . Erorn U nited States Steel Corp. (B.P. 417,799, 18.4.33).—The deleterious effects of C in Cr and Cr-Ni steels are overcome by additions of ferrochrome-titanium to the molten alloy after refining in such quantity that the Ti is 6 x % C.

A. R. P.Production of m etals and alloys [chromium

steels] containing low percentages of nitrogen.F agersta B ruks Ak tieb . (B.P. 416,545, 1.1.34. Swed,11.12.33).—In the manufacture of stainless steel and Fe in induction furnaces a continuous stream of C02 is passed through the furnace to displace the N2 during the refining period. A. R. P.

Iron-chromium alloys. E lectro Metallubg. Co , Assees. of F . M. Becket and R. F ranks (B.P. 416,811 and 419,680, [a ] 11.7.33, [b] 18.7.33. U.S., [ a , b ] 2.11.32). -—(a ) Claim is made for ductile steels containing (a ) Cr > 30, C > 0-3, Ti > 4 (% C) + 1-5, Mn > 1, and Si > 1%, (b ) Cr 2—30%, C > 0-5%, and Nb < 4 times the C content; preferably the C is >■ 0-2 when the Cr is < 16%, and > 0-35% when the Cr is 16—30%. The alloys should contain Mn > 1, Si > 1, and impurities > 1%- A. R , P .

(a ) Spring steel, (b) Steel for nitriding. J. K. Smith , Assr. to B eryllium Corp . (U.S.P. 1,943,347—8,16.1.34. A p p l, 10.8.31).—The steel contains (a ) Be0-3—5-0 (0-35), Mo 0-35—1-5 (0-35), Cr 1—1-5 (1), C 0-35—0-5 (0-35), and Mn 1—1-5 (1)% ; or (b) Be0-35—5 (0-35), Mo 0-5—5 (0-5), Cr 1-5—3 (1-5), C0-15—0-5 (0-15), and Mn 0-5%. A. R. P.

Alloy steels, particularly for cold-drawing dies.W . H . H atfield and J. F. B ridge (B.P. 419,621,25.7.33).—The steel contains W 8—25 (10-27), C 1 (0-39), Cr > 8 (3-13), V > 3 (0-54), Co > 20 and/or Mo 8, and A1 2 (1-21)%, and is case-hardened in NH3 after rapid cooling from 1000—1300° (1150°) and tempering at 550—700°. A. R. P.

Hardening of steel and alloy stee ls / R. F e ix andE. Scheinberger (B.P. 419,196, 27.3.34. E r, 29.3.33. Addn. to B.P. 367,630 ; B , 1932, 388).—Small quan­tities of gum arabic, glucose, or the like are added to the pectin solution (used for quenching steel after harden­ing) to temper the quenching action and reduce its embrittling effect. A. R. P.

Manufacture of articles [hydrogenation appar­atus] from steel alloys. E. K r u p p A.-G. (B.P. 419,009, 29.11.33. Ger, 7.12.32).—Apparatus for hydro­genating coal or oil, or for the synthesis of NH3, is made of non-austenitic steel containing <11 (<C 0 14)% C and sufficient Ti « 4 x % C) to combine with all the C ; in addition, the steel may contain >■ 3% Mo and/or V and > 10% Cr. A. R. P.

Production of [steel] articles or work-pieces the surface of which is wear-resisting and the core of which is tough. Ve r e in . Stahlwerke A.-G. (B.P. 416,420, 8.3.33. Ger, 9.3.32).—Articles of plain C steel with 0-6—0-8% Mn are case-hardened by any of the ordinary methods until the C content of the surface reaches the eutectoid composition corresponding with the Mn content, and are then annealed for 20—30 min. a t 10—30° > the Ac3 point of the original steel and air- cooled. The Mn may be partly replaced by Cr, W, Mo, or V, in all 3> 0-5%, the Si content is preferably 0-35—0-8%, the Ni > 3%, and the Cu 1-5%. A. R. P.

Removal of rust from, and pickling, iron and steel. A. A. Thornton. From Ver ein . Stahlwerke A.-G. (B.P. 418,994, 3.5.33).—Waste H 2S04 from petrol­eum and C6H6 refining is diluted to d 1 • 32—1 - 38 and heated with steam for 30—60 min. a t 90°. The cold acid makes an efficient pickling bath which removes rust without pitting the metal. A. R. P.

Manufacture of a rust-preventing composition.li. A. Walters (B.P. 419,487, 7.12.33. E r, 12.10.33).— A mixture of finely-ground FeS (140) and Na2C03 (40 g.) is dissolved in a mixture of 83% H3P 0 4 (400) and H 20 (600 c.c.) a t room tem p, and 30 c.c. of the product are diluted to 1 litre for use as rustproofing solution. A. R. P.

Purification of copper. Br it . N on-Ferrous Metals R es . Assoc, and G. T. Callis (B.P. 416,572, 8.2.33).— Bi may be removed from Cu by treating the molten metal in a MgO-lined reverberatory or crucible with an alkali metal, oxide, hydroxide, or carbonate in presence of air or an oxidising agent. [Stat. ref.] A. R. P.

Copper alloy. H. E. P otts. From F urukawa D enki K ogyo K abusiiiki K aisiia (B .P. 418,231, 22.4.33).— Claim is made for an a-Cu alloy containing Zn 30—4 (22), Ni 0-1—10 (4), A1 0-1—3 (1), Sn 0-1—5 (1), and Cu >- 78%. The alloys are annealed at 600—950° (750°), quenched in cold H 20, cold-worked, and tempered a t 250—600° (420°) for 1 hr. A. R. P.

Corrosion-resistant and mechanically workable[copper-zinc] alloys. Oesterr . Dynamit Nobel A.-G. (B.P. 418,772, 7.7.33. A ustr, 8.7.32).—Claim is made for ¡3+y-brass alloys containing < 50-5% Zn and2—10 (3—4)% Co and/or Ni. A. R. P.

Annealing of alloys [brass strip or wire]. Gen . E lectric Co, L td , and M. C. Caplan (B.P. 415,428,18.2.33).—The strip or wire is passed continuously through a furnace in which a slight pressure of inert or reducing gas is maintained; loss of volatile constit­uents is avoided by making the inlet and outlet fit closely to the metal passing through them. [Stat. ref.]

B ritish C hem ica l A b s tr a c ts — JB.

loC Cu X.—Metals ; Metalluboy, including Electro-Metallubgy.

(a, d ) Treating [zinc sulphide] ores. (b) Chloridis- ing ores by means of ferric chloride, (c, E, f , g) Chloridising metallurgical sulphide ores. (h ) Treating tin-bearing ores. (j) Treating silver- bearing ores. (k) Recovering values [zinc and lead] from a sulphide ore. (l) Producing metal [zinc] chlorides from ores. T. A. Mitchell, Assr. to L. M. H ughes (U.S.P. 1,943,331—41, 16.1.34. Appl, [a] 1.5.30, [b , c] 30.12.30, (d) 20.1.31, [e ] 4.3.31, [f ] 2.4.31, [g] 6.4.31, [u] 25.5.31, [j] 27.10.31, [k] 24.12.31,[l] 8.3.32. Renewed [b ] 17.8.33, [c, d ] 30.1.33, [e ]20.2.33, [f ] 7.10.33).—(a) An intimate mixture of finely- ground Zn sulphide ore with sufficient CaO to form CaS04 with the S content is roasted and agitated a t a low temp, to form a pulverulent, non-sintered product from which the ZnO can readily be extracted with gas liquor [aq. NH3 + (NH4)2C03] ; the Zn is pptd. as basic ZnC03 by boiling the leach liquor, (b ) The ore is roasted with CaO as in (a) and the Pb and Zn are con­verted into chlorides by treating the roast with gaseous IIC1 or impregnating it with FeCl3 and continuing the roasting until the FeCl3 is completely decomposed, (c) The roasted ore, as in (a), is leachcd with HC1 to remove the greater part of the ZnO as pure aq. ZnCl,, and the residue is treated with more HC1 and Cl2 to form FeCl3 and roasted in air a t 300° to convert the ZnFe20 4 and ZnSi03 into ZnCl2, which is subsequently leached out. (d ) In the process claimed in (a), an excess of CaO is used to convert the ZnO and Fe203 into Ca zincate and ferrate, (e ) Zn-Pb sulphide ore is roasted to a low S content, mixed with CaCl2 sufficient to react with all the S04", and treated with HC1 gas and Cl2 to chloridise the Zn, Pb, and Fe ; the product is roasted in air a t 300° to decompose FeCl3, the Cl2 being returned to the previous stage and the residue leached with H 20 to extract ZnCl2. The solution is treated with CaC03 to ppt. ZnC03, and the CaCl2 solution is heated with steam and the S02-S 03 gases from the roaster to pro­duce HC1 for the chloridising step, (f ) Zn-Pb sulphide ore is roasted in a multiple-hearth furnace (I) with CaO to combine with the S, and a Cl2 current is passed into (I) a t the discharge end to form ZnCl2. (g) Roasted and raw Zn sulphide ores are treated together with aq. FeCl3 and the mixture is dried and heated in air a t 300° to decom­pose FeCl3 and to chloridise the Zn. (ii) In applying the chloridising processes described above to Zn ores con­taining cassiterite, the vapours (II) from the chloridising step contain SnCl4 and this is recovered by passing (II) through fresh charges of roasted ore so that the SnCl4 is decomposed by the ZnO present, ( j ) In treating argentiferous Zn ores by the above processes the residue from leaching out the ZnCl2 is extracted with hot aq. NaCl to remove the AgCl. (k) Roasted ZnS ore is leached with dil. H 2S04 to dissolve most of the ZnO without removing any other metal and the residue is treated with HC1 or FeCl3 as in (b). (l) The method of (a) is used for the manufacture of pure ZnCl„.

“ A. R, P.Production of cadmium. Ajie r . S melting &

R efin in g Co. (B.P. 419,507, 23.3.34. U.S., 29.3.33).— Crude Cd dust is dissolved by heating with H 2S04 (d 1-75) and the product is heated at 600—800° for 4 hr., cooled, and leached with H20 to give aq. CdS04 (d 1 -5—

1 -6), which is purified with CdS, oxidised with NaC103, and treated with CdC03, to ppt. Fe and As. The solution is then electrolysed for Cd after addition of org. colloids and MnO, to prevent deposition of Pb.

A. R. P.Refining of lead. G. K. W illiams (B.P. 417,286,

20.11.33. Austral, 25.11.32).—Crude Pb bullion (I) is passed continuously through a long refining furnace in which it is violently agitated by jets of air passed through from below while it is covered with about 2 in. of PbO slag. When the (I) contains Zn small amounts (O'2%) of antimonial dross are added continuously at the feed inlet to reduce the yj of the slag. A. R. P.

Removing bismuth from lead. A jie r .-Smelting <fe R efining Co. (B.P. 416,634, 10.2.34. Addn. to B.P. 360,789; B , 1932, 112).-,-The greater part of the Bi is first removed by addition of a Ca-Pb alloy, and most of the remainder by addition of a Li-Pb alloy ; the Pb is then chlorinated to remove excess of Ca and Li.

A. R. P.Colouring of tin and tin alloys and articles made

therefrom, applicable also to protecting sam e against corrosion. (Sir ) J. Campbell, D. J. Mac- naugiitan, and W. H. T ait (B.P. 416,608, 25.7.33).— The articles are treated anodically in dil. aq. NaOH, Na2C03, NH3, or (NH4)2C03, in > 3% aq. Na3P 0 4, borax, or picric acid, or in dil. aq. KMn04, Na2Cr04, or Cr03, washed, and immersed in a solution of an aniline,alizarin, or anthracene dye. A. R. P.

Extraction of m etals from [sulphide or arsenide] ores. C. Goetz (B.P. 416,728,17.3.33. G er, 1.4, 24.9, and 13.10.32).—Sulphide or arsenide ores of Cu, Au, or Ag containing Fe are heated in a stream of inert or reduc­ing gas at 600—800° for some h r , whereby the Cu, Au, and Ag are liberated in a coarse granular form, the Fe remaining as FeS. Metallic Fe, Fe20 3, or the like must be added to ores containing insufficient Fe to combine with the As and S. A. R. P.

Silvering [non-ferrous m etals]. T. Sime (B.P. 416,736, 19.4.33).—The article is rubbed with a paste of freshly-pptd. AgCl and CaC03. A. R. P.

Separation of gold or other concentrate from sand or other m aterials. M. Schlank (B.P. 416,886,18.12.33).—The material, made into a pulp with H 20, is fed through a series of rotating hemispherical bowls having upon their inner faces a succession of undercut baffles to entrap the heavier constituents while the lighter ones overflow from one bowl to the next.

A. R. P.(a) Treatment of cobalt-containing material

[slag], (b) Production of cobalt, (c) Manufacture of ferrocobalt. F. L. Bosqui, and R hokana Corp., L td . (B .P. 416,526— 8, 22.6.33).— (a) Cobaltiferous slag from Cu smelting is smelted with coke to obtain an alloy containing approx. Co 65, Fe 20, Cu 10, and impurities 5%, which is dissolved electrolytically in a solution containing 3—5 g. of free H 2S04 per litre, whereby the Cu remains as a sludge and a CoS04-FeS04 solution (5) is obtained from which the Fe is removed by means of Mn02 and CaC03. (b) The pure CoS04 solution from (a) is electrolysed to deposit Co until the free acid content reaches 5%, when it is returned to (a).

B ritish C hem ica l A b s tr a c ts—B .Cl. X .— M e t a l s M e t a l l u r g y , i n c l u d i n g E l e c t i i o -M e t a l l u b q y . 157

(c) The S obtained in (a) is treated with Fe or Co to remove traces of Cu and electrolysed in a divided cell to deposit Fe-Co alloy, the acid electrolyte being con­tinuously returned to (a). A. 11. P.

Manufacture of [hard] alloys [of tungsten etc.]. J. H. L. DE Bats (B.P. 416,408,12.12.32. Holl, 12.12.31). —Mixtures of carbides, silicides, borides, or tellurides of W, Ta, or Mo with a finely-divided bonding metal, e.g., Co, are heated in a graphite mould or crucible until a pasty stage is reached, when they are extruded, pressed, or forged into the desired shape for cutting tools.

A. E. P.Working up substances containing vanadium.

Otavi Minen- u . E isenbaiin-Ges . (B.P. 417,081,13.10.33. Ger, 28.10.32).—Aluminothermic slags from the pro­duction of ferrovanadium (I) are reduced with coke in the electric furnace to obtain a corundum slag and crude(I), which is ground, roasted to oxides, and reduced with A1 to obtain a high-grade (I). A. R. P.

Purifying light m etals [sodium]. H. N. G ilb e r t , Assr. to E. I. D u Pont d e , N em ours & Co. (U.S.P. 1,943,307, 16.1.34. Appl., 24.8.31. Renewed 6.4.33).— Na is melted in a closed container (I) having a conical bottom terminating in a sump in which the impurities (NaCl, CaCl2, etc.) settle and from which they are removed by a continually working screw conveyor operating in an upwardly inclined shaft. Fresh Na is constantly fed into the middle of (I) while the purified metal is withdrawn through a filter (II) by suction applied to a storage chamber above (I) and connected to(II) by a vertical pipe. The whole apparatus is flushed with N2 during operation. (II) consists of a cylinder of wire gauzes of gradually decreasing aperture from the outside to the inside. A. R. P .

Recovery of pure m agnesium from crude m ag­nesium or magnesiferous materials. Oesterr . Am erikan . Magnesit A.-G. (B.P. 418,789, 6.2.34. Austr., 30.5. and 21.12.33).—Crude Mg is distilled in an inert gas stream, or a mixture of MgO or calcined dolomite with A1 and/or Si is heated at the b.p. of Mg, and the vapours are passed through dust-collecting chambers into a condenser in which the condensed droplets of Mg fall into a liquid hydrocarbon oil.

A. R. P.Aluminium-base alloys containing magnesium.

I. G. F arbenind. A.-G. (B.P. 417,106, 11.4.34. Ger.,17.6.33).—The resistance to superficial and intercryst. corrosion of A1 alloys with 4—16% Mg is improved by addition of 0-1—2% Ce, with or without > 2% (in all) of Mn, Zn, or Ca. A. R. P.

Soldering and m etallising of m etals [iron and aluminium], E. II. E. J ohansson (B.P. 418,466,4.11.33).—The metal (I) to be joined is heated with a mixture of a Cd halide, CaF2 or an alkali fluoride, and a halide of another metal reducible by (I). E.g., for A1 a mixture of CdCl2, ZnCl2, and a flux of KC1 and CaF2 is used to produce a solder containing a 1 : 3 Cd-Zn ratio, and for Fe a halide mixture containing Cd and Sn in the ratio 10—30 : 70—80. A. R. P.

Production of aluminium-coated m etal [iron].C. G. F in k (B.P. 415,732, 25.2.33. U.S., 27.2.32).— The Fe or steel is heated in H2 a t about 1000° to deoxidise

and decaiburise the surface and to saturate the metal with H0 prior to immersion in the molten Al.

2 1 A. R. P.Coating of zinc- or cadmium-base m etals. New

J e r s e y Z inc Co, Assees. of E. C. T ru e s d a le and E. J . W ilh e lm (B.P. 419,782, 27.1.34. U.S., 13.5.33).—The metal is dipped for 2—30 sec. in a solution containing Na2Cr20 , or CrO, 25—200 g , and H2S04 (d 1-84)1—V c .c per litre A. R. P.

Coating of objects made of or covered with zinc.II. T ichauer (B.P. 419,469, 18.7.33. Ger, 18.7.32 and29.3.33).—The articles are immersed in a solution containing NiS04 S> 5, (NH4)2Mo04 ¡> 2J, and NH4G10 -2—1% ; about 0-3% of K H tartrate is added occasionally to prevent pptn. of basic salts. A. R. P.

Production of adherent m etal coatings [tin­plating] on iron, steel, or other m etal. D. J.Macnaughtan (B.P. 417,411, 25.8.33).—The metal is first tinned by immersion in a bath of molten Sn, then plated with Sn in a bath containing Na2Sn03 150 and NaOlI 20 g./litre, using a Ni or Fe anode and a c.d. of 15 amp./sq. ft. a t 70—75°, the electrolyte being con­tinuously or periodically regenerated in a second divided cell, using Sn anodes, and subsequently insol. anodes to oxidise the stannite to stannate. A. R. P.

Coating of base materials of all kinds [with metal powders]. E. Techen (B.P. 414,038, 19.12.32). —The material is sprayed with a mixture of Si02 (40), MnOa (5), CaC03 (15), and Portland cement (15%) made into a thin paste with a gum-like solution of casein (50), borax (20—30), and 20% rosin emulsion (46) in II20 (150 pts.). After drying, the film is impregnated with aq. Al(OAc)3, again dried, and rubbed with finely- powdered metal or pigment, either alone or suspended in H20 or dil. glue solution, so that the metal is forced into the surface layer of the film. Finally the articles are varnished or lacquered. A. R. P.

Anodic coating of zinc-base m etals. H. G. C. F airw eather . From N ew J ersey Zinc Co. (B.P. 414,966 and 419,781, [a, b] 13.1.34).—(a) The metal is anodically oxidised in aq. NaOH or Na2C03 of f n <C13-3, starting a t 5— 10 volts and rapidly increasing the e.m.f. to 30—90 volts. The preferred electrolyte contains 100—200 g. of Na2C03 per litre. (b) The electrolyte is a solution of an alkali zincate, aluminate, stannate, chromate, or tungstate of f n 13—12 ; it is operated a t 6—30 volts a t room tem p, and 3—10-miff, treatment of the Zn is sufficient. A. R. P.

Electrodeposition of cadmium. E. S. A ndrews. From Amer . Smelting & R efining Co. (B.P. 417,419,18.10.33).—The electrolyte consists of a solution of CdS04 (100—165) and H2S04 (20—50 g./litre) con­taining as addition ageilt (0-5 g./litre) the product obtained by baking at 195° a paste of equal wts. of wholewheat flour and bran bonded with molasses. A ferrosilicon anode is used and the Cd content of the bath is replenished daily. A. R. P-

Dissolution of m etals of the platinum group. [Stripping rhodium plate.] Mond N ickel Co, L td , and R. H. Atkinson (B.P. 419,819, 12.5.33).—The article is immersed in a fused NaCN and/or KGN bath

B ritish C hem ica l A b s tr a c ts—B .

158 Cl. X I.— E l e c t r o t e c h n i c s . Cl. X II.— F a t s ; O i l s ; W a x e s .

to which KOH or NaOH may be added to reduce the m.p. ; a preferred composition is KCN 12, NaCN 18, and NaOH 70%. Stripping of Rli from Ag may be accelerated by making the article the anode with ac.d. of about 2 amp./sq. dm. A. R. P.

Nitrogenisation of steel or alloy-steel articles. C h a p m a n V a l v e M a n u f g . Co , Assees. of V. T. M alco lm (B.P. 420,937, 16.10.33. U.S., 24,4.33).—See U.S.P. 1,929,392 ; B , 1934, 679.

Removing metal from lubricants.—See II. Prod­ucts from spinels. Treating Tl-Cd and cyanide solutions.—Sec VII. Sound records.—See X III. Zn therapy.—See XX.

X I.— ELECTROTECHNICS.Ten-kilowatt granular-carbon resistance furnace.

J. W. Cu t h b e r t s o n (Metallurgia, 1934,10, 141—147).— The resistance element is a mixture of crushed graphite and, e.g., coke. The furnace will heat 12—15 lb. of metal to 1600° in about 1-5 h r , but the time may be reduced by working at 100% overload for about 30 min. A.-c. operation is necessary, a tapped transformer or variable voltage generator (30—90 volts) being satisfac­tory. Details are given of thermal losses, efficiency, (about 40%), choice of refractories, and upkeep.

H. F. G.Wire for resistance furnaces. A. G. Arend (Biec.

R ev, 1933, 113, 248).—-Reduction of the % Cr in Ni-Cr wires raises the m.p. but lowers the temp, at which the winding can be used without deterioration. The manufacture of this wire is described. Ch. Abs. (e)

Magnetic m aterials. A survey in relation to structure. W. C. E llis and E. E. Schumacher (Met. & Alloys, 1934, 5, 269—276).—Magnetic materials may be classified as soft or hard. The former have high max. permeability (P), low coercive force (C), and a hysteresis (H) loop of small area. In the latter, low P is associated with high C. For low forces where high P is required, permalloy (78% Ni, 22% Fe, with or without Mo or Cr) or II2-treated Fe may be employed. For const. P and low H perminvar (Ni 45, Co 25, Fe 30%) is suitable under small magnetising forces and Fe-Ni alloys and Si steels under higher fields. With fields of 10—50 oersteds Fe-Co (50%) is used. Powdered cores of low H loss may be made from 80 :20 Ni-Fe con­taining S. This material may be hot-rolled, but is fragile in the cold. E. H. B.

Influence of conditions of preparation of carbon electrodes on their properties. L. W a s il e w s k i and A. K o to w ic z (Przemysł Chem, 1934, 18, 618—628).— Increase in the tar content, in the fineness of milling of the grains of C, and of the pressure applied results in diminution in the resistance (I) and in increase in the crushing strength (II) of the product, whilst admixture of A120 3, Fe20 3, or Si02. and prolongation of heating a t 1200° before pressing result in the opposite effects. Raising the temp, of briquetting, or increasing its duration, leads to diminution in both (I) and (II).

R. T.Transform er oils.—See II. Conductivity of

molten g lass.—See VIII. Induction furnace [forsteels]. Magnet steel. Periodic hardness in

m etals. Analysis of elektron m etal. X-Ray inspection of castings. Detecting m etallic particles in products. Zn-plating baths. Electrolysis of Z nS04. Oxidation of Al. Preventing corrosion.— See X. Determining S vals. of so ils.—See XVI. X-Ray methods and fluorescence analysis in food industry.—See XIX. Anaesthetic EtsO.—See XX.

See also A , J a n , 27, Clean-up of gases by Mg etc. 45, Electrometallurgy of Al. A .-c. electrolysis of N a2COs and NaHC03 solutions. Effect of oxidising agents on Ni solutions. Electrochemical chlorin­ation of CgHg. 46, Prep, of colloidal solutions. 52, Pt-black. Determining Cl' in plants and ground-waters. 77, Prep, of tolylhydrazines. 92, Electrolytic oxidation of histam ine and hist­idine.

P a t e n t s .

Filling of gas-filled electric incandescence lamps.Soc. A n o n , p o u r l e s A p p l ic a t io n s d e l 'E l e c t r ic t t e e t d e s G a z R a r e s E t a b l s . Cl a u d e -P a z & S il v a (B .P . 420,877, 21.6.34. F r , 23.4.34).—Kr and/or Xe remain­ing in the supply pipe to the lamps is extracted by a vac. pump through a condenser immersed in liquid N2, 0 2, or air boiling at a pressure ;}> atm. J. S. G . T.

Manufacture of incandescence electric lamp fil­aments. B. E r b e r (B.P. 418,989, 1.5.33. Austr,7.5.32).—A C filament is heated in an atm. of TaCl5 until it becomes coated with metallic Ta, and the temp. >s then raised to 1200—1600° in an atm. of hydrocarbon vapour or in a vac. to convert the Ta into TaC.

A. R. P.[Bakelite containers for] dry primary batteries.

J. A. M cK e e , R. S. S co tt , and R. A. M c K e e (B.P. 421,053, 6.6.33).

[Partitioned boxes for] galvanic batteries. O l d ­h a m & So n , L t d , and T. G. M a ir (B.P. 420,999, 3.8.33).

Treating hydrocarbon o ils .—See II. Treating T l- Cd solutions.—See VII. Vitreous com positions.— See VIII. Cd. Colouring Sn. Producing Co, ferrocobalt, etc. Coating Zn- or Cd-base m etals. Tin-plated Fe etc. Cd-plate. Stripping Rh-olate. —See X.

XII.— F A T S ; OILS ; W AXES.Rapid method for comparison of susceptibilities

of oils and fats to oxidation. C. H. L ea (J.S.C.I, 1934, 53, 388—391 t ).—The oil or fat is dispersed on filtcr-papers in glass jars at 100° and the peroxide val. determined at intervals. Typical oxidation curves for a no. of oils and fats are given.

Hydro-cracking of animal and vegetable oils, fats, and waxes. Y . Y e n d o (Bull. Inst. Phys. Chem. R es, Japan, 1934,.13, 1373—1394).—The yield and d of “ gasolines ” obtained by the hydro-cracking of oils, fats, and waxes have been, determined. Waxes gave the best results. Similar results have been obtained with oleic and stearic acids. R. S. B.

Decolorisation of oils and fats. P. Sm it (Allgem. Oel- u. Fett-Z tg, 1934, 31, 473-481).—The problems of the choice of adsorbent earth, or C, etc. and of the determination of bleaching power are discussed;

B ritish C hem ical A b s tr a c ts —B .Ci,. XII.—Fats ; Oils ; Waxes. 159

technical decolorisation with adsorbents is briefly described. E. L.

Transformation of fatty acids in sulphonation. S. L yubarski (Masloboino Zhir. Delo, 1932, No. 11, 53—55).—With non-hydrogenated cottonseed and sun- flower-seed oils sulphonation considerably increases the proportion of solid fatty acids (S ) a t the expense of liquid fatty acids. With hydrogenated oils sulphonation decreases S. The proportion of saturated acids increases with increase in % H 2S04. Ch . Abs

Detergent power of sulphonated soaps. II. L. Szeuo (Giorn. Chim. Ind. Appl, 1934, 16, 533—537 ; cf. B , 1934, 803).—Experimental trials indicate that soaps of the type R0-S03Na (R = alkyl) are superior in detergent power (D) to soaps of the type RC02Na con­taining the same no. of C atoms. In both cases the max. val. of D is given by the Cl6 soap, and the intro­duction of an ethylenic linking increases D. D. R. D.

Halibut-liver oil. H. F. Taylor (Drug and Cosmetic Ind., 1934, 35, 603—606, 685).—A general account of the halibut (life history etc.) and the therapeutic val. of the liver oil are given. Commercial halibut ranges from 8 to 25 years old. The “ New and Non-Official Remedies ” of the Amer. Med. Assoc, specify a rnin. potency of 45,000 International Units of vitamin- A and 615 I.U. of -D for the oil. E. L.

Bodying of pilchard oil. H. N. B rocklesby andO. F. D enstedt (Ganad. Chem. M et, 1934, 18, 252).— The large proportion of highly unsaturated glycerides in pilchard oil (I) cause it to oxidise more readily than vegetable oils. Very light-coloured bodied oil may be produced by bodying in vac. Solid saturated glycerides are apt to ppt. spontaneously from highly polymerised (I) and are also responsible for tackiness in the dry film, and the pptn. of certain driers. These defects can be avoided by bodying in a stream of superheated steam, which distils off the saturated fatty acids. Heating at

275° causes extensive decomp. The characteristic odour of (I) is lost on bodying. G. H. C.

Linseed stand oils and temperature of treatment.F. Ohl (Farbe u. Lack, 1934, 554—555).—Since the changes progressing in stand oil cooking are largely colloidal, tabulation of external characteristics, e.g., I val, is insufficient to lead to a precise understanding of the process. The content of saturated glycerides, which depends on the climate in which the seed is grown and the manner of expression, may considerably affect the colloidal processes of the thickening. G. H. C.

Oil c o n te n t o f c o tto n se e d . N. Sofin (Masloboino Zhir. Delo, 1932, No. 11, 57—63).—Chemical matur­ation of the seed is desirable. P fertilisers are especially beneficial. Ch . Abs.

Detection of wood oil. Z. L epper t and Z. Majewska (Przemysł Chem, 1934, 18, 471—473).—A drop of 90% H2S04 is placed on a drop of o il; when this contains < 10% of wood oil the drop of acid does not spread, but rapidly darkens and assumes a polygonal contour. The reaction serves for mixtures with raw, boiled, and aerated linseed oils. R. T.

Purification of edible oils. C. H. K eutgen (Chem.- Ztg,1935, 59, 34—37).—A review of modern methods.

Detection of margarine and hardened oil in food­stuffs . J. Grossfeld and J. P eter (Z. Unters. Lebensm, 1934, 68 , 345—358).—A semimicro-mcthod is described for detecting hardened oils (I), the presence of which is a more certain means of identifying the margarine (II) in present use in Germany since coconut (and similar) oils are less commonly used. The method is based on the determination of the % of elaidic acid (HI), incorporat­ing Margosches’ method (B , 1924, 639) of determining the I val. of the Pb salts of the fatty acids insol. in EtOH. The % of (III) in (I), (II), butter, beef, and mutton fats, lard, and cacao butter (IV), as determined by examination of the first (V) and second crystallisation products (VI), are given. Addition of <£ 10% of (I) to(IV) can be detected by examination of (V), and of1—2% by examination of (VI). The natural (III) content of a fat interferes only when the % of butter in a mixture is 20, or of beef or mutton fat 10.

E. C. S.O il in d ex . J. R, S te w a r t (Nat. Paint, Varnish and

Lacquer Assoc, In c , Dec, 1934, Circ. 474, 378—410). General notes together with data for acid, I, and sap. vals, unsaponifiable matter, d, tin, colour, and rj are recorded for a representative range of commercial raw and treated vegetable and animal oils used by the American paint industry, including linseed, perilla, rape- seed, soya-bean, castor, tung, oiticica, and fish oils and miscellaneous fatty acids, spermaceti, etc. S. S. "W.

Microscopy [of oils etc.].—See I. Lubrication. Cutting fluids. Degreasing m etals.—See X. Pecan nuts. I val. of p ig ’s fat. Determining fat and sugar in cocoa etc. —See XIX.

See also A , J a n , 64, Acids of croton oil. Compos­ition of cacao butter. 106, Arachidonic acid in butter-fat. 129—131, Vitamins. 134, Fat of C ortinellus Shiitake. Fat in barley and malting products.

P atents.Extraction of [animal or vegetable] oils. H. E. J .

P eake, and E llerman’s Arracan R ice & T rading Co, L td . (B.P. 421,049, 9.3, 10.5, 30.6, and 12.10.33).— Much oil is liberated by treating the comminuted material (nuts etc.) with 3* 15% of oil-miscible liquid (fatty or paraffin oil) and <£ 30% of hot H 20 containing NaCl (in the case of sesame seed glycerin may be added). Further oil may be recovered from the residue by treat­ment with hot air, or by fermentation with the aid of non-organised proteolytic and saccharifying ferments {e.g., diastase). (The use of lactic acid-producing bacteria is specified in the first provisional specification.) In order to avoid troublesome emulsions, hard H20 should be softened and protein material may be coag­ulated by the addition of, e.g., Irish moss. E . L.

Modified castor oil. W. M. Stanley, Assr. to E. I. Du Pont de N emours & Co. (U.S.P. 1,955,348,17.4.34. Appl, 27.3.31).—The partly solid (m.p. about 58°) and partly liquid (viscous oil) product obtained by heating castor oil (I) with about 0 • 1% of Se at 200 300 , which rancidifies less easily and absorbs less 0 than (I), is used as a softener for nitrocellulose compositions.

B ritish C h em ica l A b s tr a c ts—B .

1 6 0 C l . X U I . — P a i n t s ; P i g m e n t s ; V a r n i s h e s ; R e s i n s .

Purification of ricinoleic acid. T. H. R i d e r , Assr. to W. S. M e r r e l l Co. (U.S.P. 1,955,021, 17.4.34. Appl, 11.2.32).—(i) The saturated fatty acids are removed by freezing (at —15°) a solution of the castor oil fatty acids in an alcohol (Me, Et, Prp, Bu, etc.). The liquid acids may be (ii) recovered by saponification and acidification, or (iii) converted into, e.g., M e esters, and the OH of the ricinolcic acid esterified by, e.g., Ac20, after which the ricinoleate ester may be separated by fractional distillation; only steps (i) and (ii) are referred to in the claims. E. L.

Manufacture of sulphonated oils. E. P o h l , Assr. to S. P o h l (U.S.P. 1,955,766, 24.4.34. Appl., 30.10.31).— A sulphonated oil is made to react with a polyhydric alcohol (glycerol, ethylene glycol, etc.), in amount at least = the glycerin present in the original oils before sulphonation, in presence of small amounts of H 2S04 (d 1 - S3), the excess of which is subsequently neutralised.

E .L .Manufacture of em ulsions of edible fatty oils.

E. M . M u l l e r (B.P. 421,126, 14.6.33).-—Oils are emulsi­fied with a solution of sugar and/or honey and binding agents (gums etc.) which have been treated with CaO, Ca(OH)2, or Ca(HC03)2 so as to form saccharates in situ which act as stabilisers. E. L.

Glycerides. Acid amide derivatives. Aq. em ul­sions [of w axes]. Textile assistants. Chlorinated hydrocarbons.—See III. Combinations containing polyvinyl compounds.—See XIII. Germicidal p rep s—See XX.

X III— P A IN T S; PIGM ENTS; V A R N ISH ES; RESINS.Composition of Russian turpentine oil. B. A.

A r b u zo v (J. A p p l. Chem. Russ, 1934, 7, 757—759).— The product (from Pinus silvestris) contains ¿-a-pinene 76-48, ¿-A3-carene 13-67, Z-terpene 6-87, and higher-b.p. fraction 1-20%. R. T.

Flow tests with paints containing zinc oxide, [raw] linseed oil, stand oil [and turpentine]. H. L.Matthijsen (Verfkroniek, 1934, 7 , 325—327).—Data obtained with paints of stated composition are tabulated. The flow properties arc not related in any simple way with the 7] of the stand oils. D. R. D.

Mechanised buhrstone dressing [for paint]. P. W . W e h r l e and C. O. S tro m (Amer. Paint J , 1934, 19, No. 10, 7—9, 44—50).—A machine for dressing buhrstones and experiments in grinding paints with buhrstones dressed in different ways are described.

D. R. D.Priming-coat reductions for painting new wood

surfaces. F. L. B r o w n e (Paint, Oil, and Chem. R ev , 1934, 96, No. 25, 12—19 ; Amer. Paint J , 1934, 19, No. 9, 7—9, 48—51).—The present state of the panels painted in 1931 ( B , 1932, 194) is described and the results are discussed. D. R. D.

Technology of ship-bottom paints. N. E . A d a m so n (Drugs, Oils, and Paints, 1934,49, 494—496).—Formulae for paints for use on the bottoms of steel and woodenships are given. D. R. D.

Inhibition of mould growth on paint. H. C.B r y s o n (J. Dec. Ait, 1935, 55, No. 649, 17—19).—

A review. Photomicrographs of the species of mould commonly found growing on painted surfaces are given.

D .R .D .U ses of aluminium paint. Anon. (Decorators’ and

Painters’ Mag, 1934,34, 331—332, 340—341).—Suitable media for A1 paints for different purposes are recom­mended. D. R. D.

Discoloration of lead paints by hydrogen sulph­ide. A. A. K r a e f (Verfkroniek, 1934, 7, 332—333):— Discoloration is far more pronounced for any given % of Pb in the paint if it is present as PbO or basic car­bonate, than if present as PbS04 or basic sulphate.

D .R .D .Durability of paints. C. A. L. De B ruyn (Verf­

kroniek, 1934, 7, 336—337).—A satisfactory acceler­ated test for rust-resistant paints comprises submitting the panels repeatedly to the following cycle of oper­ations : immersion in II20 , drying in a ir 'a t 60—70°, exposure to moist air containing SO„ and immersion in H20. D .R .D .

Weathering of bituminous coatings. J. P . P f e i f f e r (Verfkroniek, 1934, 7, 337).—The factors affecting their deterioration on exposure are discussed.

D .R .D .Painting of iron constructions. S t ic h t in g voo r

M a t e r ia a l o n d e r z o e k (Verfkroniek, 1934, 7, 323— 324). . D .R .D .

Lacquer raw m aterials. A. W. v a n H e u c k e r o t h (Nat. Paint, Varnish and Lacquer Assoc, In c , Dec, 1934, Circ. 472, 364—369).—General physical and chemical properties are recorded for the following materials : abietolene (a high-boiling pine-tree product), seven modified castor oils (six alkyl ricinoleates, and acetylated castor oil), COMeBu?, C0Pr2, three alkyl phthalyl glycollates, and two samples of “ Plexigum ” or “ Acryloid ” resins (polymerised acrylic acid esters). Ethylcellulose was also examined for y), inflammability, and eSect on H20-resistance, durability, and strength of film when introduced into nitrocellulose lacquers.

S. S. W.Cellulose lacquers. G. S. B a r su k o v (J. Appl. Chem.

Russ, 1934, 7, 770—777).—The wood or metal surface is first covered with a basis consisting of lacquer (I) 2, talc 2, and Fe20 3 1 p t , and then with ordinary cellulose lacquer. (I) is prepared from colloxylin 18, oxidised colophony S-5, EtOAc 54, and EtOH 19-5 pts.

R. T.Natural resinous products. IV. E. A s t e r (Verf­

kroniek, 1934, 7, 328—331; cf. B , 1935, 33).—The mode of occurrence, chemistry, and general properties of dammar and shellac are reviewed. D. R. D.

Rehabilitation of natural resins. W. K r u m b h a a r (J. Oil Col. Chem. Assoc, 1934,17, 413—436).—Natural resins are returning to favour since methods have been found to confer on them some of the desirable properties discovered in the synthetic materials. Rosin reacts with PbO and other oxides so much more readily when they are finely dispersed tha t the reaction may. be carried out at lower tem p, or even in mineral spirit solvents, thereby giving very pale products. The use of the turpentine-rosin balsam direct from the tree for incorporation in varnish is suggested. G. H. C.

C l. X III .— P a i n t s ; P i g m e n t s ; V a r n i s h e s ; R e s i n s .

B ritish C hem ica l A b s tr a c ts—B .161

An application of the method of triangular co-ordinates to the comparison of drying times [of oil varnishes] with composite driers. W. H.D y so n (J. Oil Col. Chem. Assoc., 1934,17, 437—442).— Drying times of a varnish with varying mixed 3-com- ponent driers are set out in a series of triangular tables, each of which covers all possible ratios of the 3 metals at a fixed total concn. 6 . II. C.

Coumarone resins and their applications. J. B o ja n o w s k i , B. G iz iń s k i , and T. R a b e k (Przemyśl Chem, 1934, 18, 321—325).—Practically colourless resins are obtained by conducting the polymerisation in presence of 15 : 4 : 1 H2S04-A c0H -H 20, or by treating the benzol with H2S04 (d 1-70) at 30°, when dark resins are obtained, and then treating the oil with 97% H 2S04 in presence of (NH4)2S04, when light resins are formed.

R. T.Synthetic resins used in the manufacture of

varnishes. II. E. F o n r o b e r t (Verfkroniek, 1934, 7, 333—336).—The properties of the different types are discussed from the viewpoint of the varnish manufacturer.

D. R. D.Microscopy [of resins etc.]. Zeiss photometer.

—See I. Pilchard oil. Linseed stand oil.— See XII.

See also A , Ja n , 31, Lowering the tj of cellulose nitrate solutions. 50, Blue ultramarines.

P a t e n t s .

Production of titanium pigm ents. T it a n Co, I n c . (B.P. 417,699, 20.10.33. U.S., 28.11.32).—Loaded or unloaded Ti02 pigments are intimately mixed with MgO (MgO: T i02 > - 2 : 1 ) and a small amount of HC1 and the mixture is calcined at 900°. [Stat. ref.]

A. R. P.Dispersion of pigm ents. E. C. d e S t u b n e r (U.S.P.

1,955,738, 24.4.34. Appl, 18.1.29).—An aq. dispersion of a pigment (P) in the same state of subdivision as at p p tn , e.g., a washed filter cake, is treated continuously with the vapour of a displacing fluid (I), e.g., PhMe in the case of PbCr04, which is then distilled off together with the H 20 under reduced pressure. (I), separated from the H 20 in the condensate, is returned to the P, the cycle being repeated until the P is freed from H20 and is wetted by (I). The process eliminates the need for drying and grinding in the manufacture of printing inks, lacquers, etc. S. S. W.

Crystallising varnish. W. O. S t a u f f e r , Assr. toE. I. Du P o n t d e N e m o u r s & Co. (U.S.P. 1,954,835,17.4.34. Appl, 11.2.29).—Blown tung oil and a drier are incorporated into a solution in an aromatic hydro­carbon of an alkyd resin which has been modified with a drying oil, drying oil acids, or rosin ; gasoline is used as thinner. S. M.

[Waterproof] coating compositions. C. S. H a t h ­a w a y , Aśsr. to L. E. H a r d in g (U.S.P. 1,956,442, 24.4.34. Appl, 5.11.30).—“ Drip oil ” (the condensate from high- pressure illuminating gas) is worked up with a drier, rosin, etc. Portland cement is also incorporated for coating concrete. S. M.

Asphaltic coating compositions and materials [e.g., rubber] coated therewith. A . M. A lv a rad o

and A. N . P a r r e t t , Assrs. to E. I. Du P o n t d e N em o u r s & Co. (U.S.P. 1,955,355, 17.4,34. Appl, 24.11.30).— In the process of U.S.P. 1,934,709 ( B , 1934, 797) in­corporation of an Fe compound of either oil acids or a natural resin, e.g., Fe linoleate, produces increased durability, lustre, and compatibility of the asphalt and resin. 15 examples are given. S. M.

Protective [nitrocellulose] coating composition. Y. H. T u r k in g t o n , Assr. to B a k e l it e Co r p . (U.S.P.1.954.836.17.4.34, 20.7.28).—A resin prepared according to U.S.P. 1,677,417 (B , 1928, 681) is used together with >• 20% of nitrocellulose in suitable solvent mixtures.

S.M.Manufacture of resinous condensation products.

J . Y. J o h n so n . From I. G. F a r b e n in d . A.-G. (B.P. 420,525, 25.5.33).—Cyanuric acid (1 mol.) is condensed a t > 160° with CH20 ( > 2 - 5 mols.) or a polymeride, in H20 or an org. solvent, which is subsequently removed. S. M.

Manufacture of combinations containing poly­vinyl compounds. Co n so r t , f . E l e k t r o c h e m . I n d .G.m.b.H. (B.P. 420,564, 7.3.34. Ger, 8.3:33).—A monomeric CH2!C! compound is polymerised in admix­ture with or solution in a wax or wax-like substance. Thus, e.g., CH2!CH-OAc (950 pts.), beeswax (50 pts.), C6Hg (50 pts.), and Bz02H (9-5 pts.) give at the b.p. a homogeneous product. B.P. 404,504 (B , 1934, 244) is disclaimed. H. A. P.

Cellulose organic ester composition comprising a phthalic acid ester of a monoether of hydro- quinone [quinol]. C. J. St a u d and T. F . M u r r a y , j u n , Assrs. to E a st m a n K o da k Co. (U.S.P. 1,950,907,13.3.34. Appl, 29.7.32).—A cellulose ester (acetate) lacquer containing a neutral phthalate of a quinol monoalkyl (Me, CH2Ph) ether (<£ 2%) is used as a layer for protection of cellulose nitrate against ultra­violet light. H. A. P.

(a ) Manufacture and application of plasticisers [for cellulose derivatives and synthetic resins].(b ) Plasticised compositions and articles made therefrom. H. D r e y f u s (B.P. 420,181 and 420,221, [a , b ] 17.2.33).—(a ) The products are hydroxymethyl esters of polycarboxylic acids [o-C6H4(C02H)2] and their esters and ethers. Interaction of 0-C6H4(C0 )20 , 40% aq. CH20, and IIC1 a t >■ 40° gives (?) bishydroxymethyl ■phthalate, the Ac2 derivative of which is obtained from Na2 phthalate and CH2Cl*OAc (I) a t the b.p. This is hydrolysed by dil. H2S04 a t the b.p. to acetoxymethyl H phthalate [Me ester (Me2S04 and aq. NaOH, or Na Me phthalate and CH2C1-OAc)], which is also obtained from Na H phthalate and ( I ) ; its 3 : 6-C£2-derivative is similarly prepared, (b ) Cyclic monomeric esters from dicarboxylic acids [o-C6H4(C02H)2] are used as plasticisers for cellulose derivatives (nitrate, acetate). Examples are ethylene [o-C0II4(CO)2O and C2H4(OH)2, and 0-5% H3P 0 4 a t 135°; or by heating Na p- chloroethyl phthalate at 150°], s-dicarbelhoxyelhylene [from (•CHCl-C02Et)2], and ¡3&'-imimdiethyl phthalate (¡3S'-dichlorodiethyl phthalate and NH3). H. A. P.

Oilcloth [backing]. A. B. B u c h a n a n (U.S.P. 1,956,343, 24.4.34. Appl, 5.12.30).—Oilcloth backing compositions comprise an aq. paste of adhesive, e.g.,

b

B ritish C hem ical A b s tr a c ts—B .

162 C l . XIV.— I n d i a - R u b b e r ; G u t t a - P e r c h a .

casein, flour, starch, or latex, a heavy-bodied vegetable (e.g., linseed) oil or varnish, and a suitable filler, e.g., cliina clay, silex. The absence of org. solvents eliminates undesirable impregnation of the fabric. S. S. W.

Production of cellulose ester or ether moulding powders. Brit . C e la n e s e , Ltd. (B.P. 421,115,13.4.33. U.S., 13.4.32).—A finely-divided cellulose ester or ether and a plasticiser are agitated in aq. suspension, without grinding, in presence of a wetting agent, e.g., Turkey-red oil, and, preferably, a swelling agent, e.g., xylene.

S. M.Manufacture of m asses [sound records] contain­

ing m etals in a fine state of dispersion. I. G. F arbenind. A.-G. (B.P. 418,096, 20.1.34. Ger, 27.1.33). —Strips for sound recording are prepared from a kneaded mass of plastic acetylcellulose (100) a n d . Fe powder (200 pts.) obtained by thermal decomp, of Fe(CO)s and containing no particles > 6—8 ¡a. A. R. P.

Manufacture of metal salts of polymeric carb- oxylic acids and of shaped articles therefrom.(a, b) I. G. F arbenind. A.-G, and (b) W. W. Groves (B.P. 420,533 and Addn. B.P. 420,589, [a, b] 1.6.33. Ger, [a ] 2.6.32).—(a) Polymeric carboxylic acids rich in COaH, and (b) interpolymerides of unsaturated acids with other polymerisable substances, are converted by metathesis into salts of Cu, Ag, or Au or of metals of the Al, Mg, Fe, Sb, or Sn groups. The products have thermoplastic and film-forming properties (from solutions in dil'. alkalis) and on ignition give (catalytic) masses of metal or oxide. Examples are : (a) Ag, Hgn, Fem, Tl, and Ni polyacrylates, Zn polyvinylacetate, and Co poly-a-methylacrylate; (b) Al salt of maleic acid(I)-CHoICH'OMe polymeride, Cosaltof CH.,!CIi-C0oH -j- CH2:CH-CN, Zn salt of (I) + CILiCHPh (II), Cd salt of CH„:C(C02H)„ + (II), and Cu salt of (I) + (II).

H. A. P.Plastic composition or putty. C. W. R ichards,

H. D odd, and I m perial Chem . I ndustries, L td . (B.P. 420,528, 30.5.33).—A filler (china clay) is incorporated in a mixture of a molten chloronaphthalene, a natural resin (rosin), and resin oil. S. M.

Reaction products of glycols and H3B 0 3. Aq. em ulsions [of resins].—See III. Coating tennis- racket strings.—See V. High-glaze finish for fabrics etc.—See VI. [Pigm ents from] T i solutions. —See VII. Coating base m aterials with m etals.— See X. Modified castor oil.—See XII.

X IV .— IND IA-RUBBER, GUTTA-PERCHA.Coagulation of alkaline [rubber] latex. J. D.

H astings (J. Rubber Res. Inst. Malaya, 1934, 5, 351— 371).—On account of progressive changes which it undergoes, jSTH3-preserved Hevea latex shows wide Variation in behaviour towards coagulants and its satisfactory conversion into sheet rubber is difficult. By the use of a mixture of Na2SiF6 and MgCl2 or MgS04 as coagulant, this difficulty can be obviated, but pre­liminary trials may be necessary for determination of the best proportion. The corrosive action of these coagulant mixtures on Al would be an obstacle to their adoption for the coagulation of fresli latex. D. F. T.

Characteristic properties of rubber at low temperatures. T. F ujiw ara and T. T anaka (J. Soc. Rubber In d , Japan, 1934, 7, 154—161).—-With under- vulcanised samples the tensile strength increased as a result of increased hardness. Below —63° to —68° the stress-strain curve was not smooth. Rubbers with the same S content showed greater tendency to freeze and harden with an increase in the degree of vulcanisation. The tensile strength and % elongation are inadequate for estimating the val. of rubber at low temp. Ch. Ab s .

Tensile properties of [rubber] latex products.H. B arron (India-Rubber J , 1934, 8 8 , 712—714).— Earlier statements as to the superior tensile properties of latex rubber after vulcanisation are confirmed; the tensile strength, ultimate elongation, and particularly the resilient energy considerably exceed those of an ordinary rubber mixing of comparable composition. This advantage is attributed to the reticular structure of the latex rubber. D. F. T.

Determination of free sulphur in rubber. I. Iodometric method. V. B olotnikov and V. Gurova.II. Oxidation with permanganate. N. R ogov (J. Rubber In d , U.S.S.R, 1933, 10, 61—62).—I. 2 g, of the finely-cut rubber are boiled for 2 hr. with 100 c.c. of 5% aq. Na2S03 ; excess of Na2S03 is removed from the cold filtrate with 5 c.c. of 40% aq. CII20. After addition of 20 c.c. of 20% AcOH the solution is titrated with 0 -1N-I.

II. The material sol. in C0Me2 is boiled with 4—5 c.c. of H 20 and 5—6 g. of solid KOI! or N aO H ; the solution is diluted with 200 c.c. of HaO, the S being oxidised with AT-KMn04 and determined gravimetrically. Ch . A bs.

Modification of Volliard’s method of determin­ing free sulphur in vulcanised rubber ; application to determination of free sulphur in commercial mercaptobenzthiazole. S. Minatoya, I. N agai, andI. Aoe (J. Soc. Rubber In d , Japan, 1934, 7, 123—134). —The fraction of 2 g. sol. in COMe2 is refluxed for 30 min. with 25 c.c. of abs. EtOH and a small piece of KCN ; after evaporation to dryness, addition of 30 c.c. of C0Me2, stirring, filtering, and addition of 5 c.c. of 30% H N 03 and Fe111 salt, the solution is titrated with 0 - lAr- AgN03. 0-5—1 g. of mercaptobenzthiazole (I) is simi­larly treated, up to filtration ; after washing with C0Me2 and removing COMe2 in the filtrate, the residue is dis­solved in 50 c.c. of H 20, and made slightly acid to litmus with 30% HN03. The ppt. of (I) is collected, washed with H 20, and the filtrate rendered slightly alkaline with KOH. (I) is completely removed by addition of Pb(N03)2, the ppt. being washed with H 20. The filtrate is acidified with 5 c.c. of 30% H N 03 and titrated with AgN03 in presence of Fe111 salt. Ch . Ab s .

Perishing of rubber under atmospheric influ­ences. A. Van R ossem (Verfkroniek, 1934,7, 337— 338). A lecture. D. R . D.

Paper fibres with rubber.—See V. Rubber m ix­ture for balloons.—See VI.

See also A , J a n , 134, Rubber resins.

P atents.Manufacture of articles containing gutta percha

or balata. Dunlop R ubber Co, L td , D . F. Tw iss , and

B ritish C hem ica l A b s tr a c ts—B .C l . X V .— L e a t h e r ; G l u e . C l . X V I .— A g r i c u l t u r e . 103

F. A. J okes (B.P. 420,626, 7.11.33).—The surface of moulded articles composed wholly or in part of vulc­anised or unvulcanised gutta-percha or the like is rendered harder and “ drag-free ” by treatment with an acidic substance containing the S02'01 i group, e.g., H 2S04 or PhS03H, in presence of oxidising agents if desired. The treated articles, -which may be neutralised, e.g., with aq. NH3, and washed, can be polished and show an improved adhesion to paint. D. F. T.

[P ro d u c tio n of sy n th e tic ru b b e r by] p o ly m e ris ­a tio n of d iene h y d ro c a rb o n s . W . A. G ib b o n s andE. 3VI. McColm, Assrs. to N a u g a t u c k Ciiem. Co. (U.S.P. 1,953,169, 3.4.34. Appl, 26.8.31).—The ground bark of Hevea brasiliensis is extracted with H 20 at room temp. (24 hr.), Pb(OAc)2 is added to the extract, and the pptd. Pb salts are decomposed with H2S. The product is mainly citric acid containing an active polymerisation catalyst for butadiene e tc , and is used in an aq. emulsion containing small amounts of Ca and Mg salts of H2S04 and H3P 0 4. H. A. P.

Gas-producing materials for inflating hollow articles of rubber. I n d ia R u b b e r , Gu t t a P e r c h a , & T e l e g r a p h W o r k s Co, L t d , and H. J. S t e r n (B.P. 416,591, 22.3.33).—A mixture of NaN02 (56-5), NH4C1 (43-5), and (NH4)2C03 (10 pts.) is inserted into hollow rubber articles prior to vulcanisation; on heating, C02, NH3, and N2 are evolved which expand the article up to the mould during vulcanisation. A. R . P .

Vulcanisation of rubber and accelerators there­for. D u n l o p R u b b e r Co, L t d , D. F. T w is s , D . J . H a d l e y , and F. A. J o n e s (B.P. 420,852, 17.11.33).— Rubber is vulcanised by heating with an accelerator (^1), which has been deactivated by treatment with a keten, to such a temp, that A is reactivated. Mercaptobenz- tliiazole is converted by keten into an Ac derivative and diphenylguanidine into a Ac3 derivative. Other classes of A, e.g., piperidine piperidinocarbothionolate, can also be treated. D. F. T .

Polishing etc. cloths.—See VIII. Asphaltic coat­ing for rubber.—See X III. Adhesives.—See XV.

XV.—LEATHER; GLUE.Zeiss photometer.—See I.

P a t e n t s .

Preparation of tanning material. I. C. S o m e r v il l e and II. R . R a t e r in k , Assrs. to R o h m & H aas Co. (U.S.P. 1,951,564, 20.3.34. Appl, 14.7.31).—A phenol(I) (1 mol.) is condensed with an aldehyde (CII20) ( > 1 mol.) and thiourea (II) in presence of a sulphonat- ing agent. Examples of (I) are PhOH [ > 0-2 mol. of(II)] and 4 : 4'-CH„(C6H 4-0H), [ > 0-4 mol. of (II)].

H. A. P.Adhesives [containing rubber]. W. Ze it l in (B.P.

420,747, 27.5.33).—In the assembling of leather skins an adhesive is used containing latex (20% rubber con­tent), vulcanising agents, a H 20-sol accelerator, and possibly an antioxidant and suitable dye The coated skins, after coagulation of the adhesive, are warm- pressed. “ Pinholes ” may be filled with rubber.

D. F. T.

Adhesive foil. G. L ie n ig (U.S.P. 1,955,075, 17.4.34. Appl, 29.1.31).—Defibrinated blood is acidified a t 40° with 0-5% lactic acid, then mixed with 2-3% of (NH4)2S04 in solution, the mixture kept at 40° for1—3 h r , rendered slightly alkaline, and the product mixed with 8—12% of glycerin and 5% of a dénaturant, e.g., alum, synthetic tannins. D. W.

Aifixing stam ps. E. B . B e n g e r , Assr. to E. I. Du P o n t d e N e m o u r s & Co. (U.S.P. 1,953,946, 10.4.34. Appl, 17.10.31).—A material the surface of which is normally non-responsive to H20-sensitive adhesives, e.g., waxed or moisture-proofed regenerated cellulose, is treated over the desired area with a composition com­posed of natural or synthetic rubber, oxidised rubber, gutta-percha, or balata, with or without oils, resins, cellulose derivatives, softeners, casein, gelatin, metal alkyl phthalates, etc. dissolved, suspended, or dispersed in a volatile liquid (C6H6, CS2, etc.). F. R. E.

Reaction products of glycol and H3B 0 3.—See III. Dyeing and carroting fur.—See VI. Ti compounds [as tanning agents].—See VII.

X V L — AGRICULTURE.Soil physics. A. A. Y a r il o v (Trans. Com. I Internat.

Soc. Soil Sci, Sov. Sect, A l, 1933, 7—33).—A summary.A. M.

Soil structure. A. N. S o k o lo v sk i (Trans. Com. I Internat. Soc. Soil Sci, Sov. Sect, A l, 1933, 34—110). —A summary. A. M.

Process of gley formation. O. P. D o sm a no v a (Trans. Dokuchaiev Soil In s t, 1934, 9, 161—188).—Gley horizons are characterised by a heavy texture which contributes to the development of the gleying ; silicate decomp, is low and leaching of Fe20 3 and A120 3 incon­siderable. A120 3 predominates over Fe20 3, but free A120 3 is absent. Exchangeable FeO is low and the pn > 6. A. M.

Formation of secondary calcium carbonate in soils. V. A. K o v d a (Trans. Dokuchaiev Soil In s t, 1934, 9, 247—253).—Washing a column of quartz sand, inter- layered with CaS04, with V-Na2C03 converts all the CaS04 into CaC03. A similar reaction takes place during the désalinisation of the gypsum horizon of solonetzes.

A. M.Reclamation of virgin black alkali soils. J. L.

W u r s t e n and W . L. P o w e r s (J. Amer. Soc. Agron, 1934, 26, 752—762).—Reclamation by irrigation and drainage alone is impracticable. Crop yields following chemical treatment (S, CaS04, manure) are closely related to the proportion of Ca" in the exchange complex. S and CaS04 used simultaneously give better results than either used alone ; CaS04 alone is inferior to S alone.

A. G. P.Distribution of soil moisture under isolated

forest trees. H. A. L u n t (J. Agric. Res, 1934, 49, 695—703).—The H20 content (I) is lowest immediately beneath the crown in surface layers and at depths of3—4 ft. Lateral distribution shows irregular zones of (I) increasing with distance from trunk and with depth.

A. G. P.Nature of reactions responsible for soil acidity.

III. J. M u k h e r j e e , S. R o y c h o u d h u r y , S. M u k h e r j e e ,

b 2

B ritish C hem ical A b s tr a c ts—B .

164 Cl. XVI.—A g r i c u l t u r e .

and B. Majumdar (Indian J. Agric. Sci, 1934, 4 , 733— 757).—From the results of electrometric titrations, S i02 sols appear to combine the characteristics of a strong and a weak acid. Data for A120 3 sols are also given. Adsorbed Al” ;’ on A120 3 sols are stable at approx. 6 • 4. A. 6 . P.

Physiological significance of mineral acidity in soils. M. T k & n e l and F. A l t e n (Angew. Chem, 1934, 47 , 813—820 ; cf. B , 1934, 976).—A1 is a sp. root poison. The [H'J of soils influences plant growth only insofar as it controls the occurrence of AT". The assimilatory process in plants is more acutely disturbed by A1 than is the actual intake of nutrients. A1 poisoning is not corrected by Ca". A1 taken up by plants is largely pptd. in the roots and restricts, but does not entirely prevent, the translocation of P 0 4" ' from roots to stems and leaves. A. G-. P.

Soil-adsorption com plex and physical properties.A. M. P ankov (Trans. Dokuchaiev Soil In s t, 1934, 9, 237—245).—A summary. A. M.

Adsorption com plex of soils of the Premanych region. A. M. P ankov and P. I. Shavrigin (Trans. Dokuchaiev Soil In s t, 1934, 9 , 205—235).—Increase in solonetzosity appears to be connected with increase in adsorbed Mg. A. M.

Salt content of soils near the Salt Plain in Alfalfa County, Oklahoma, in relation to crop production. H. F. Murphy (J. Amer. Soc. Agron, 1934, 26, 644—- 650).—Barrenness in these soils is mainly due to the high sol. salt content and low C a : Na ratio. The influence of pa is small. A. G. P.

Process of continental salt accumulations in soils, rocks, underground water and lakes in W. Siberia. I. P. Gerasimov and E. N. I vanova (Trans. Dokuchaiev Soil In s t, 1934, 9 , 101—135).—The Kalunda steppe consists of rocks of river, lake, and fluvio-glacial origin. Salts liberated during weathering and soil formation are the source of the salts in the Kalundian lakes. The soil-vegetation complex is connected with the degree of mineralisation of the soil layer of ground-h 2o. a . m.

Role of vegetation in the process of continental salt accumulation. T. A. Gevelson (Trans. Doku­chaiev Soil In s t, 1934, 9, 137—159).— Stcdice gmelini (I) and Artemesia maritima salina (II) on the Kalunda steppe have high salt content, (I) showing preference for Cl' over S04", whilst (II) prefers S04" even on the same soil.

A. M.Distribution of “ calcicole ” and “ calcifuge ”

species in relation to the content of the soil in calcium carbonate and exchangeable calcium and to soil reaction. B. L. T. de Silva (J. Ecol, 1934, 2 2 , 532—553).—Distribution of “ calcicoles ” is corre­lated with the exchangeable Ca in soils, and that of “ calcifuges ” with soil reaction. A. G. P.

Effect of gypsum on artificial solonetz. U. U.U spanov (Trans. Dokuchaiev Soil In s t, 1934, 9 , 84—99). —CaS04 should be introduced into the soil in a dry state and washed with small amounts of H20 to increase the effective [Ca”]; Sufficient CaS04 to give a ratio of adsorbed Na to Ca of 1 : 2 is required to effect complete

replacement of the Na. Complete flocculation of the clay is not immediately attained after saturation with Ca. A. M.

Changes in soil microflora during the désalinis­ation of carbonate solonetz. N. N. Sushkina (Trans. Dokuchaiev Soil In s t, 1934, 9, 189—204).—The devel­opment of Azotobacler on S i0 2 gel decreases with the solodisation of carbonate solonetz, and ceases in solodised soils. Nitrification in upper horizon decreases with solodisation but increases in the 20—30-cm. horizon.

A. M.Microbiological studies in the irrigated regions

of Transcaucasia and Turkestan. S. I. K u zn etz o v (Trans. Com. I l l Internat. Soc. Soil Sci, Sov. Sect, A,1933, 113—131).—The soils contain considerable nos. of denitrifiers which cause large losses in N 03' during irrigation. The low efficiency of N fertilisers (I) is not explained by the conversion of N into protein by the bacteria. Introduction of large amounts of (I) may decrease easily sol. P 20 5. A. M.

Soil microbiology in the U .S.S.R . (1917—1932).E. E. U spenski (Trans. Com. I l l Internat. Soc. Soil Sci, Sov. Sect, A, 1933, 7—91).—A summary. A. M.

Review of work on root-nodule bacteria. M. P.K orsakova (Trans. Com. I l l Internat. Soc. Soil Sci, Sov. Sect, A, 1933, 140—161). A. M.

Determination of lim e requirements of soils in association with soil surveys. J. A. P rescott and C. G. Stephens (J. Counc. Sci. Ind . R es, A ustralia,1934, 7, 185—189).—Buffer curves are obtained by Veitch’s method of evaporating with Ca(OH), followed by pa determination of the treated soil residues. Loss on ignition (I) is closely correlated with buffer capacity (II) in soils of a particular group. In podsolic soils, sands, and sandy loams, CaO requirement may be calc, from a single pa determination and the use of (I)—(II) curves. In swamp soils better correlation is shown between the pa of the natural soil and the amount of CaO required to raise the val. to 7-0. A. G. P.

Determination of S values in forest soils and humus. IV. G. D ein es (Z. Pflanz. D iin g , 1934, A, 3 6 ,156—195 ; cf. B , 1934, 33 ; 1933, 883).—An electro- metric titration method is described and is compared with accepted displacement processes. A. G. P.

Variations in analytical results for hydrochloric acid extracts [of soils], especially regarding silica and alumina. F. K. H artmann and F. Meyer (Z. Pflanz. Diing, 1934, A, 3 6 , 196—224).—Variations in HCl-sol. Si02 and A1203, as determined by standard methods of the Prussian Geological Institute, in different horizons of forest soils are examined. The period of extraction materially influences vais, obtained. For characterising the state of weathering of soil materials the use of cold HC1 is suggested. A. G. P.

Determination of m agnesium in hydrochloric acid soil extracts by the “ oxine ” [8-hydroxy- quinoline] method. H . J. H ardon and W. W ir jo d i- hardjo (Chem. Weekblad, 1934, 31, 662).—Analysis of soil extracts by the standard method (cf. A , 1927, 639) is protracted on account of occlusion of Mg in the A1 and

B ritish C hem ical A b s tr a c ts —B .Cl. XVI.—Agriculture. 165

Fe ppt. This may be overcome and tlie process short­ened by pptg. the Mg-oxine complex in presence of conc. aq. Na tartrate, which keeps A1 and Fe in solution. In the approved method (details given) Mn, Ca, and Mg are first pptd. as oxines and the ppt. is ignited and dissolved in HC1. Mn is then separated as Mn02, Ca as oxalate, and Mg again pptd. as oxine, which is titrated subsequently with KBr03 solution. S. C.

Determination of the nutrient condition of moor soils. H. R h e in w a l d and H. S t a h l [with 0. L e b t a g ] (Z. Pflanz. Düng, 1934, A, 36, 129—155).—Wrangell’s methods are applied to the examination of moorland soils. The easily sol. portion of the total 1120-extract- able P 0 4" ' in these soils is unusually high, is somewhat lowered by liming on unmanured soils, and is increased by CaO on areas ' receiving P fertilisers. Application of basic slag increases the total and easily sol. P 0 4"'. Cultivation increases the proportion of H20-sol. P. A relatively large proportion of the total K is in a plant- assimilable form. The [NH4‘] in solutions of moor soils is much in mineral soils and is affected by leaching and cropping in a manner similar to that of [N03']. Calculations of fertiliser requirements agreed with results of field trials, in respect of P 0 4'" , less satisfactorily for K, and were of little val. in the case of N. A. G. P.

Microbiological evaluation of soil-manurial re­quirement. E. E. U spenski and A. P. K riutchkova (Trans. Com. I l l Internat. Soc. Soil Sci, Sov. Sect., A, 1933, 92—112).—Details of Azotobacter methods for determination of P 20 5, CaO, and K 20 requirements are given. A. M.

Luminescence of [fertiliser] phosphates. F.M a ch and P. L e d e r l e (Phosphorsaure, 1932, 2 , 623— 625 : Bied. Zentr, 1934 , A, 4, 5 51).—All phosphates examined, except basic slag (I), showed luminescence in ultra-violet light. 1 0 % of (I) in mixtures of Algerian and Florida rock phosphates can thus be detected.

A. G. P.Supply of easily soluble phosphoric acid in

surface and subsoils. C. K rügel, C. D reyspring, and W. H einz (Z. Pflanz. Düng., 1934, A, 36, 224—236). —Available P in soils occurs principally in the surface, especially in the top 5—10-cm. layer. Penetration of P fertilisers is small and unutilised surplus accumulates in surface layers. No evidence of leaching of P from soils can be obtained. A. G. P.

Transition of citrate-soluble phosphate into ci­trate-insoluble form in m ixtures with limestone and with dolomite. W. H. MacI ntyre and W. M. Shaw (J. Amer. Soc. Agron, 1934, 26, 656—661).— Transition of CaHP04 into Ca3(P04)2 brought about by high-Ca limestones was more rapid than that by dolom­ite in wetted mixtures. A. G. P.

Nitrogen fertilisers on cotton soils. J. J.Skinner , R. A. L ineberry , J. E. Adams, C. B. W illiams, and H. B. Mann (U.S. Dept. Agric. Tech. Bull, 1934, No. 452, 28 pp.).—Field trials are recorded in which the manurial val. of mixtures of N fertilisers with varying proportibns of cottonseed meal are compared.

A. G. P.

Huminic fertilisers. I. S. S. D ragunov (J. Appl. Chem. Russ, 1934, 7, 818—824).—The fundamental conditions of prep, and application of the fertilisers are enumerated. R- T.

Use of charcoal as a manure. Scheel (Allgem. Forst- u. Jagdz, 1932, 108, 240; Bied. Zentr, 1934,A, 4, 558).—Charcoal improves aeration and H 20- capacity of soils. Lignite (I) facilitates N assimilation by plants. Various humin substances prepared by chemical treatment of (I) are discussed. A. G. P.

Manurial value of Westphalian coal ash. H. Monnig (Angew. Chem, 1934,47, 842—845).—Complete analyses of the ashes are recorded together with II20 - and acid-sol. portions. Comparative cultural exper­iments with coal ash and powder are described. H. W.

Fermented manure and ordinary stall manure.J. Weig ert and F . F urst (Z. Pflanz. Diing, 1934,B, 13 , 473—509).—The internal temp, of hot- and cold- fermented stacks is not appreciably different. Ordinary manure (I) from an uncovered stack contains less dry matter and N than that from covered fermented stacks of similar age, but the latter is more completely rotted and retains a relatively lower proportion of the initial dry matter. Fermented manure (II) has similar proportions of P and K to (I). No significant chemical differences are apparent in hot- and cold-(II). (II) has much lower bacterial nos, especially in urea-fermenting types. In extended field trials with potatoes, hot-(II) showed only a small advantage over the other forms. Spring and autumn applications of (I) were equally effective, but (II) gave best results in spring. A. G. P.

Effect of seed dips on germination and growth of wheat. W. Schütz -(Diss, Hohenheim, 1931 ; Bied. Zentr, 1934, A, 4, 513).—The stimulatory effect of various seed disinfectants is shown especially in root development. A. G. P.

Effect of applications of sodium chlorate and ammonium thiocyanate on subsequent sowings of wheat. R. B issey and O. Butler (J. Amer. Soc. Agron, 1934, 26, 838—846).—In absence of leaching, dressings of 100 and 200 lb. of NaC103 per acre ceased to be toxic after 131 and 237 days, respectively. Decomp, of NH4SCN in soil is very rapid, no appreciable ill effects being shown with 100 lb. per acre. Stimulative effects were observed 69 days after application of 800 lb. per acre. A. G. P.

Effect of composting on chemical and biological changes in peat and in wheat straw. A. J. B aur (J. Amer. Soc. Agron, 1934, 26, 820—830).—In well- decomposed peats KC1 depressed N 03' formation and development of autotrophic organisms. This effect was not apparent with K2S04 or K 2H P 04. (NH4)2S04used alone or with P, K, and CaO temporarily increased bacterial nos. and depressed fungal growth. CaO alone had little chemical or biological action. On poorly decomposed peat CaO used alone or with mixed fertilisers increased nitrification. All treatments, except those with CaO or manure alone, increased NH3 accumulation and favoured development of fungi. A. G. P.

Role of organic matter in plant nutrition. V. Influence of minute quantities of certain forms of

B ritish C hem ica l A b s tr a c ts—B .

166 Cl. X V I .—A gricü ltd ee .

organic matter on growth of barley. G. S. S id d a p p a and V. Su b r a h m a n y a n (Proc. Indian Acad. Sci, 1934,1, B, 229—248 ; cf. B , 1935,116).—The superiority of org. manures over artificial fertilisers is apparent only in bulk applications and is probably due to the presence of growth-promoting substance. A. G. P.

Response of inbred lines and crosses in maize to variations of nitrogen and phosphorus supplied as nutrients. S. N. S m it h (J. Amer. Soc. Agron, 1934, 26, 785—804).—Transmitted characteristics in relation to efficiency of utilisation of various levels of N and P supply are examined. A. G. P.

Compatibility of hemp, flax, and oats in mixed cropping on soils of varying fertility. L . D o b ru n o v (Z. Pflanz. Diing, 1934, B , 13, 510—515).—In mixed crops hemp (I) suppressed the growth of oats (II) on rich soils (III), but (I) predominated on poor soils (IV). In the early stages of growth (I) suppressed flax on(III), but was in turn suppressed on (IV). At maturity (I) was the stronger crop on both soil types. A. G. P.

Size, shape, and replication of plots for field experiments with cotton. B. B. R e y n o l d s , D. T. K il l o u g h , and J. T. V a n t in e (J. Amer. Soc. Agron, 1934,26, 725—734).—Applications of statistical methods to field trials are examined. A. G. P.

Comparison of legum es with respect to nitrogen accretion. T. L. Lyon and J. A. B i z z e l l (J. Amer. Soc. Agron, 1934,26, 651—656).—Of legumes examined, lucerne was the most effective in increasing soil N. Accumulation of N was most marked when the legum­inous crops were grown for hay. The gains in soil N were greater and losses less in soils initially poor in N.

A. G. P.Influence of the planting period on the yield and

seed value of potatoes. B. S w ie t o c h o w s k i (D osw . Roln, 1931, 7, No. 30, 31 pp. ; Bied. Zentr, 1934, A, 4, 502).—Planting later than the optimum period resulted in reduced yields of tubers having lower starch and higher crude protein, total N, and ash contents. The proportional intake of P, in comparison with that of N and K, declined, and the utilisation of absorbed minerals decreased. Tubers from late-sown potatoes showed poorer amylase activity and higher [H ], and produced weaker sprouts. A. G. P.

Changes in the content and proportions of mineral substances in vegetables, with special reference to iodine. G. F is c h e r (Diss, Jena, 1931 ; Bied. Zentr, 1934, A, 4, 484—485).—The loss of alkali(I) and alkaline-earth (II) metals during cooking of vegetables is that of S04". Addition of NaCI has little effect on losses of Ca and Mg. Extraction of Ca by hard waters is <C th a t by soft waters. High manuring with K markedly increases the K and Na contents of spinach, the ratio K : Na remaining approx. const. Dialysis of plant saps results in the removal of larger proportions of (II) than of (I) elements. The I content of individual species varies considerably. The capacity for I absorption by different species shows wide diver­gence. I occurs in plants principally in org. combin­ation and is probably related to the chlorophyll, carotene, or vitamin-A content. A. G. P.

Apple investigations in Tasmania. W. M. C arn e and D. M a r tin (J. Counc. Sci. Ind. Res, Australia, 1934, 7, 203—2 14).—Storage diseases are investigated. The mol. concn. of apple juice is linearly related to n in a given species. A. G. P.

Experimental error in field experiments with pineapples. 0 . C. M a g is ta d and C. A. F a r d e n (J. Amer. Soc. Agron, 1934 , 26, 631—6 44).—Statistical examination of soil variations in relation to plot size is recorded. A. G. P.

Interrelation between cultural treatment of pecan trees, the size and degree of filling of the nuts, and the composition of kernels. H. L.C ra n e and M. B. H a rd y (J. Agric. R es, 1934, 49, 643— 661).— Effects of pruning and of applications of N fertilisers are recorded. The composition of kernels depends mainly on the degree of filling, well-filled samples having high oil and low protein, carbohydrate, and H 20 contents. A. G. P.~

Influence of agronomic factors on cultivation of perilla. E. L y u b a rs k i (Masloboino Zhir. Delo, 1932 , No. 11, 63—64).—When seeds are sown late the area yield of oil, but not the oil content of the seed, is reduced ; the I val. is higher. With early seeding, close sowing slightly lowers d and I v a l.; with late seeding it increases I val. Ch. Abs.

Influence of soil, climate, and manuring on the quality of sugar beet and their manufacturing treatment. V. D esn is iv sii, F. U k ra d ig a , S. Sac, M inc, P. GroSev, S. K le jb s , and A. S c e p e tiln ik iv (Naulc. zap. eksp. Inst. Sacharin. Prom , 1931 , 14, 347 ; Bied. Zentr, 1934 , A, 4, 4 9 2 ).—The composition of beet is influenced by soil type and climate. The objectionable N and ash constituents are affected by manurial treatment. The N content is reduced by manuring with P. A. G. P.

Paraffin [wax] for overwintering storage of sugar beet. H. L. K o h l s (J. Amer. Soc. Agron, 1934, 26, 846— 8 51).—“ Mother ” beet for seed produc­tion, when coated with paraffin wax, lose little H20 or sucrose during winter storage and give as satisfactory seed yields as when stored in moist sand. A. G. P.

Influence of soil treatment on composition of sweet clover. H. J. S n id e r and M. A. H e in (J. Amer. Soc. Agron, 1934 , 26, .740—7 4 5 ).— The effects of N, P, and K fertilisers, and of CaO, on the mineral and N contents of sweet clover are recorded. N, P, and K accumulate in roots during winter and are rapidly translocated to tops during subsequent spring growth.

A. G. P.Effect of manures at different altitudes on the

nitrogen and mineral content of grass and clover species. T. W. F a g a n and W. E. J. M ilto n (Welsh J. Agric, 1 9 3 4 ,1 0 ,1 7 4 —18 9 ).—In species suited to growth on hills manuring increased the N and ash constituents to extents comparing favourably with those of lowland species. A. G. P.

Recovery of nitrogen in pastures from applic­ation of nitrogenous manures. III. Swards under the Warmbold system . T. W. F a g a n ancfR . 0 . D av ie s (Welsh J. Agric, 1934 , 1 0 , 190—1 96).—Effects

B ritish C hem ical A b s tr a c ts—B .Cl. XVI.—A g r ic u l t u r e . 167

are recorded of seasonal differences and time of applic­ation of (N |l4)2S04 on the distribution of yields over the grazing season. Increased N contents following use of fertilisers is mainly in forms other than protein-, NH,-, or NH3-N. L oss of fertiliser-N after severalseasons of intensive grazing averaged 38%. A. G. P.

Natural pastures : their response to super­phosphate. J. G. D a v ie s , A. E. S c o t t , and K. M. F r a s e r (Counc. Sci. Ind. Res., Australia, 193d, Bull. No. 83, 76 pp.).—Superphosphate dressings markedly increased the sheep-carrying capacity of pastures (I), but did not affect the yield or quality of fleece per sheep. Seasonal changes in nutrient val, botanical and chemical composition of the herbage are recorded. The increased P content of fertilised (I) was largely accounted for by differences in plant species. Legumes were considerably increased. A. G. P.

Influence of manuring on yield and botanical composition of lowland pastures : (a) under con­trolled grazing by sheep, (b ) under hay conditions. T. E. J ones (Welsh J . Agric., 1934, 10, 223—235).— Field trials are recorded. A. G. P.

Effect of controlled grazing and manuring on natural hill pastures. W. E. J. M il t o n (Welsh J. Agric, 1934, 10, 196—211).—Applications of Ca or P 0 4" ' alone increased yields on pastures examined, but Ca produced no additional increase on those receiving N, P, and K. Complete manuring gave the most uniform distribution of yield over the season. Differences between manurial effects on Molinia and on fescuc-bent swards are recorded. A. G. P .

Deviation of yields from duplicate pot cultures-F. L. D a v is (J. Amer. Soc. Agron, 1934, 26, 831— 838).—Statistical data concerning pot cultures of sorghum is examined. A. G. P.

Comparative cost and effectiveness of tillage and of chlorates in controlling Morning Glory, Canada thistle, and perennial saw thistle. D. C. T in g e y (J. Amer. Soc. Agron, 1934, 26, 864—876).— Costings favoured tillage. NaC103 reduced the subse­quent yield of potatoes in some cases. Weeds most difficult to eradicate by tillage were most easily killed by KC103, and vice versa. A. G. P.

Effect of chemical soil treatments on root, crown, and shoot rot of m ilo. II. E. M y e r s (J. Amer. Soc. Agron, 1934, 26, 737—739).—Generous applic­ations of N prolonged the life of plants grown on disease-infested soil, but did not completely overcome the pathological condition. The disease is npt directly related to alkaline reaction in soil. A. G. P .

Displacement of soil solubles through plant roots by means of air pressure as a method of studying soil fertility problems. C. W. L a u r it z e n (J. Amer. Soc. Agron, 1934, 26, 807—819).—Analyses of solutions collected from cut stems of plants following the application of air pressure to the roots and sur­rounding soil reflected fertiliser treatment of the soil, and the composition of dil. acid extracts of soil. The [K'] and [P04"'] of expressed solutions were higher and the [Ca"] was lower when living roots than when dead roots were used. A. G. P.

Soil deficiencies and plant diseases. A no n . (Imp. Bur. Soil Sci, Tech. Comm, 1934, No. 31, 46 pp.).— A review, with extensive bibliography, of diseases associated with deficiencies of Mn, Fe, Mg, B, Cu, and Zn. A. G. P.

Spray drying of insecticides and allied chem ­icals. E. C. A lf o r d (Chem. Met. Eng, 1934, 41, 634—636).—The plant of the Westwell Chemical Co, Calif, is described. D. K. M.

Apparatus for testing contact insecticides. F. T a t t e r s f ie l d (Ann. Appl. Biol, 1934, 21, 691—703).—- Appropriate apparatus is described and changes in spray distribution are examined in relation to size of orifice and distance of sprayed surface. A. G. P.

Insecticidal properties of som e East African plants. I. R. R, L e G. W o r sl e y (Ann. Appl. Biol, 1934, 21, 649—669).—A no. of plants have been examined. Extracts of Tephrosia vogdii have the same order of toxicity to soft-bodied insects as has nicotine sulphate. Tephrosin (T) occurs in nearly all parts of the plant, with highest proportions in seed. Crude T contains 20% of a yellow cryst. substance, m.p. 227°, probably dehydrodeguelin, which is non-toxic. Resins obtained from various organs of the plant have very low toxicity. A. G. P.

Effect of environmental conditions on pyrethrum (C h rysa n th em u m cinerarisefolium ). I, II. J. T . M a r t in and F. T a t t e r s f ie l d (Ann. Appl. Biol, 1934, 21, 670—681, 682—690).—I. Insecticidal val. of pyre­thrum flowers was not affected by application of ferti­lisers, but was characteristic of the individual plant. In fully open flowers the disc florets contained 90% of the total pyrethrin (I) content, the majority of which occurred in the ovaries.

II. Flowers from plants partly shaded during 5 months preceding flowering had lowered (I) contents. Other cultural details are examined. A. G. P.

Effect of various sm ut treatments on yield of winter wheat. A. F. B r a c k e n (J. Amer. Soc. Agron, 1934, 26, 748—751).—Comparative trials over a 10-year period showed yields from Cu-treated seed to be > those from CII20-treated seed. In most cases wet treatments gave relatively lower yields when seed were sown in dry soil. A. G. P.

Effect of seed treatments on yield of oats. R. W . L e u k e l and T. R. Sta n to n (J. Amer. Soc. Agron, 1934, 26 , 851—857).—Treatment of clean seed with various proprietary fungicides produced no significant increase in yield. A. G. P.

Effect on growth of oats of copper sprays used for control of mustard. 0. B u t l e r and R. B is s e y (J. Amer. Soc. Agron, 1934, 26, 693—697).—Oats are sensitive to Cu injury, recovery from which is much slower than external appearance indicates. The rate of recovery is influenced by the severity of the immed­iately apparent injury. A. G. P.

Role of damping-off diseases in relation to failures of lucerne stands on som e acid soils. W . F. B u c h h o ltz (Science, 1934, 80, 503).—A damping-off disease of lucerne is associated with acidity in some Iowa soils. Less damping-off of seedlings occurs in

B ritish C hem ica l A b s tr a c ts—B .

168 Cl. XVII.— S u g a r s ; S t a b o h e s ; G u m s .

acid soil at 9° than at 20—25°. Limestone and hydrated CaO probably inhibit it. Acid soil steamed for 2 hr. under pressure or treated with 0-5% CH20 yields a higher % of healthy seedlings than does untreated neutral soil. L. S. T.

Action of lim e-copper sprays of varying con­centration on P h yto p h th o ra in festa n s, in potato.H. N e u m a n n (Oesterr. Z. KartofFelbau, 1931, 133—137 ; Bied. Zentr, 1934, A, 4 , 567).—Increased yields of potatoes resulting from spraying with 1—2% Cu preps, are due to formation of larger tubers during the length­ened (8—14-day) vegetative period. The concn. of the spray was without influence. A. G. P.

Penetration, distribution, and effect of petroleum oils in apple. P. A. Y o u n g (J. Agric. R es, 1934, 49, 559—571).—Oils penetrate apple leaves and pass into twigs and are located in the parenchyma and tracheae. Oil injected into boughs was observed 1 year later in the annual rings a t distances up to 80 cm. from the point of injection. Toxicity of oils is a chemical property. Injury by oil is unrelated to viscosity within the range 38—410 sec. The nature and proportion of sulphon- atable matter in oils contribute largely to their toxic action. A. G. P.

Vine m osaic. F. StranAk, C. Blaitn^, and A. Klecka (Ochrana rostlin, 1931,11,89—98 ; Bied. Zentr, 1934, A, 4, 564).—The results of infection on tissues and methods of control are described. A. G. P.

Eradication of L ep ed iu m draba. H. W. H u l b e r t , H . L. S p e n c e , and L. V. B e n j a m in (J. Amer. Soc. Agron, 1934, 26, 858—864).—Complete control followed use of NaC103 (I) in two applications during the flowering period (10-day interval) or of CS2 with 2-oz. injections a t 6—8-in. depth at 18—20-in. intervals. Plants surviv­ing (I) developed increasing resistance to injury.

A. G. P.Relation between the chemical composition of

citrus-scale insects and their resistance to hydro­cyanic acid fumigation. A. R. C. H a a s (J. Agric. R es, 1934, 49, 477—492).—Resistance to fumigation (I) can­not be correlated with the inorg. or org. Ee or ash-P contents of the insects. Possible relationships are in­dicated between (I) and the Cu, wax, and reducing sugar contents. A. G. P.

Cockchafer beetle : incidence and control. II. W. T h o m pso n (Welsh J. Agric, 1934, 10, 308—316).— C10II8, applied in early autumn, gave satisfactory results. Rainfall following treatment had a favourable effect.

A. G. P.Characteristics of “ lim onites ” used in the cure

and prevention of bush sickness. R. E. R. G r im m e t t and F. B. S u o r l a n d (Trans. Roy. Soc. N. Zealand, 1934, 64, 191—213 : cf. B , 1932, 698).—Analytical data for samples of limonite (approx. 2Fe20 3,3H20) are given. The variations in composition and in solubility in dil. acids are insufficient to account for the differences in

x therapeutic efficacy against bush sickness in cattle ; a correlation with the rate of solubility in acidic reducing agents, however, appears possible. F. 0. II.

■Fluorosis in cattle. Administration of sodium carbonate, sodium hydroxide, and flue dust. E.

T h o r m a l e n (Diss, Hannover, 1931 ; Bied. Zentr, 1934, A, 4,586—587).—Direct injury to cattle by flue dust (I) from a superphosphate factory is unlikely. (I) may be harmful through its ill effects on soil and on plants growing therein. A. G. P.

Cottonseed.—See XII. Harmful N in sugar beet. —See XVII.

See also A , J a n , 61, As content in soils. Soil structure. 131, Growth of sugar-beet and -cane. 134, Effect of B on sugar-beet development.

P a t e n t s .Fertilisers. P. Ch r is t ia n (B.P. 419,387, 12.6.33.

Ger, 11.6.32).—An A1 salt and a sol. silicate are caused to react to produce a fertilising oxide sat and A1 hydro- silicate and/or a mixture of A1 hydroxide and colloidal H4Si04. Fertilising substances containing K or P are added to the product, as well as compounds of elements, such as Ge, Ga, Ti, and Mii, which stimulate growth.

W. J. W.Production of a soluble phosphate fertiliser.

B a y e r is c h e S t ic k s t o f f -W e r k e A.-G. (B.P. 418,788,10.1.34. Ger, 11.1.33).—Phosphate rock mixed with about 15% of Si02 or with phosphorites containing this amount of Si02 is heated in a rotary furnace for several hr. in presence of steam and H2, whereby practically all the P20 5 is converted into a-Ca3P20 8 (I), which is sol. in citric acid. Quenching from above 1160° is essential to prevent conversion of (I) into the less sol. [3-form.

A. R. P.Production of m ixed fertilisers. K a l i-F o r s o h -

u n g s -A n s t a l t G.m.b.H. (B.P. 417,149, 28.6.33. Ger,7.12.32).—A mixture of K and NH4 di- or tri-phosphates is treated with HN03 to produce monophosphates, and the mixture is sprav-dried. A. R. P.

Manufacture of weed-killing preparations. J. Y.J o h n so n . From I. G. F a r b e n in d . A.-G. (B.P. 418,061,10.2.33).—Mixtures of fertilisers with H20-sol. heavv- metal salts (other than org. Hg complexes) containing < 20% of NH4C1 are claimed, e.g., NH4C1 83, CuS04 5, and CaC0312%, or NH4C125, NilN03 25, and FeS04,H„0 50%. A. R. P.“

Contact insecticide. E. W . B o u s q u e t and W . H. T is d a l e , Assrs. to E. I. Du P o n t d e N e m o u r s & Co. (U.S.P. 1,954,517, 10.4.39. Appl, 8.7.32).—Solutions or emulsions of [i p-(C2Ii4Cl)20 are utilised alone or in combination with other toxic materials. A. G. P .

(NH4)2S 0 4.—See VII.

X VII.— SUG AR S ; STA R C H ES; GUMS.Harmful nitrogen in the sugar beet. E. R o s e n b l u h

(Z. Zuckerind. Czechoslov, 1934, 59, 110—111, 115-— 120).—Using the Friedl colorimetric method (B , 1910, 1123), it is shown that the quantity of harmful N (I) in the beet depends on (a) the soil, manuring, cultural con­ditions, and time of harvesting, and (b) conditions in­capable of control, as the nature of the root, climate, and weather. Considerable differences were observed in the (I) of different types of roots cultivated under the same conditions. Two of the most important factors are the use of large amounts of nitrogenous fertilisers,

B ritish C hem ical A b s tr a c ts —B .C l . X V I I I . — F e r m e n t a t io n I n d u s t r i e s . 169

and the prevalence during ripening of hot and dry weather, both of which increase its content considerably. I t is desirable to diminish (I) in beet varieties, as high amounts adversely a fleet the natural alkalinity and puritv of the iuice and increase the amount of molasses.

J. P. 0.Microscopy of food products. VI. Sugar and

honey. C. H. B u t c h e r (Pood, 1935, 4, 169—170 ; cf. B , 1934, 810).—The examination of the H20-insol. residue from sugar is described. Flakes of dried skin are distinguished from starch by the yellow colour produced with I. The size of individual grain and freedom from damage of the crystal facets are indications of quality of white granulated sugar. Pollen grains are isolated from honey by flotation on the surface of a 30—50% solution. They are identified by comparison with air- dried type pollens gathered just before the flowers are open. These should be soaked in a filtered solution of the honey for 24 hr. before use in order to reproduce changes in shape due to HaO absorption. The i o ­nise!. m atter of good-quality honey should consist entirely of pollen grains. J . 6 .

Varietal and regional variation in properties of wheat starches. C. E. M a n g e l s (Cereal Chem, 1934, 11, 571—585 ; cf. B , 1933, 486).—The effect of heredity and environment on the properties of wheat starches (S), as measured by 7) after treatment with cold gelatinising agents (A) (NaOH, KCNS, Na salicylate, urea), was investigated. The Y] of the S from the common wheats Reward, Ceres, and Marquis decreased in the order given, with all four A. Durum S showed a higher vj with NaOH and KCNS than common S, although the difference was smaller in the case of KCNS. Regional variation was not consistent. Seasonal variation indi­cates that in hot, dry seasons the plant produces S less susceptible to swelling agents than in cold, wet seasons. Swelling capacity appears to vary inversely _ as the P content. E. A. F.

Zeiss photometer.—See I. Sugar beet.—See XVI. Determining sugar and fat in cocoa etc. Jam . X-Ray methods in the food industry.—See XIX. Starch nitrates as explosives.—See XXII.

See also A , Ja n , 32, Solutions of gum gels. 33, Physical chem istry of starch and bread-making. 68, Determination of reducing sugars, and of fructose in presence of glucose and sucrose. 70, Estérification of starch. 131, Growth of sugar- beet and -cane. Nutrient intake of maize and mustard. 134, Sugar-beet development.

P a t e n t .

Evaporation or crystallisation [of sugar solu­tions].—See I.

XVIII.— FERMENTATION INDUSTRIES.Malt analysis. British and Continental methods,

and the interrelationship of results. R. II. H o p k in s ,H . L. H in d , and F. E. D a y (J. Inst. Brew, 1934, 40, 445—455).—The essential differences between the Institute of Brewing (B) and the Congress (C) methods of malt analysis are described, and the analytical results from a no. of English- and Continental-made malts

quoted. The results show that extract lb./qr. (method B) X 0-80 gives % Plato (C method), whilst the corresponding conversion factors from B to C for mois­ture and colour are ±0-23 and X0-086, respectively; the standard errors for the three cases are given. The Continental and B methods for determining diastase are discussed and the results obtained thereby for the same malts compared, together with the N relationships of worts prepared by methods B and O. I. A. P.

Stage of fermentation at which fusel oil pro­duction commences. W. K i l p and R. D e p l a n q u e (Z. Spiritusind, 1934, 57, 306, 308, 313—314, 316).— Flaked potato mash was fermented with distillery yeast, and fusel oil (F) could be detected (Komarowsky) in the product after 6—7 hr. ; the presence of EtOII (d of distillate) was demonstrable somewhat earlier, the lag being apparently due to the need for hydrolysis of the potato-protein. Thereafter F increased as fer­mentation and yeast production proceeded. Molasses mashes with added yeast extract (2?) and amounts of yeast similar to the above gave almost simultaneous appearance of F and EtOH, changes in the amount of E having little effect. Using decreased amounts of yeast, F could be detected earlier than EtOH, the interval of time (T ) elapsing between the formation of F and that of EtOH increasing as the amount of yeast used de­creased, T also varying somewhat with the amount of E employed. Temp, was of importance for the beginning of F production. I. A. P.

Principal colouring matters in white wines. E. P e y r o t (Annali Chim. Appl, 1934, 24, 512—519).— The absorption curves of wines of various types, deter­mined spectrographically, differ markedly from those of solutions of quercetin (I), quercitrin (II), or mixtures of the two with tannin. When, however, (II) is reduced by Zn dust and H2S04, it yields curves similar to those of white (medium straw) wines. I t is suggested that even white wines contain, besides flavone colouring matters, also red colouring matters of anthocyanin type, formed by enzymic hydrolysis of part of the (II) to (I), followed by reduction of (I) -j- (II) to red colouring matters in the reducing medium of the fermenting must. T. H. P .

Detection of fruit wine in grape w ine . W. D i e i ia i r ,B . B l e y e r , and F. A r n o l d (Z. Unters. Lebensm, 1934, 68 , 364—369: cf. B , 1934, 520).—Sorbitol can be de­tected with certainty by the use of substituted PhCHO. The comparative yields of the benzylidene compound and of the o-Cl- and wi-N0 2-derivatives under experi­mental and practical conditions are given. E. C. S.

Examination of fortified wine [“ Brennwein ” ]• M. R u d ig e r (Reichs-Gesundheitsblatt, 1934, No. 22; Z. Spiritusind, 1935, 58, 2, 4).—Methods for determin­ation of EtOH, extract, sugar, ash, and titratable and volatile acids in the wine are recommended, and descriptions given of methods for examining and determining constituents of the wine distillate (volatile esters, higher alcohols, furfuraldehyde), together with tests depending on taste and smell. I. A . P.

Sulphur compounds in spirits. T. Ch rzą szcz and J. R e s z e t n ia k (Przemysł Chem, 1934,18, 360—363).— MeCHS and EtSH are formed when 0-025—5% MeCHO

B ritish C h em ical A b s tr a c ts —B .

170 Cl. XIX.—F oods.

in 10—85% EtOH is saturated with H 2S, which is no longer detectable in the solutions after 8 days a t room temp. The same process takes place during the alcoholic fermentation of sucrose. McCIIS is decomposed into MeCHO and H 2S during rectification, but is gradually regenerated in the distillate to yield products which impart a disagreeable odour and taste to the spirit.

R. T.Distillation of liquids rich in extract or con­

taining draff. B. L a m p e and R. D e p l a n q o e (Z. Spiritusind., 1934, 57, 322).—An air-bath is described, constructed from a Sn vessel with a notched upper rim, the teeth being bent out. Contact between the flask and the metal is avoided by interposing a strip of thin asbestos paper. Using this bath in the laboratory instead of asbestos gauze, charring of distillation residues is avoided, and a shortening of the times necessary for boilings and distillations may result. I. A. P.

Amino-compounds, and the composition of the sediments in m eters and alcohol reservoirs. T.Ch r z ą sz c z and J. R e s z e t n ia k (Przemysł Chem., 1934, 18, 364—366).—Unidentified amines may impart an unpleasant taste and odour to rectified spirits. The sediments forming in metal containers consist chiefly of sulphides of Fe or Cu, with traces of S04", CN', Pb, and Sn. Resistance to corrosion by EtOH containing MeCHS decreases in the order AF>Sn]>Pb]>brass^> C u>Zn>Fe. R. T.

Storing hulled rice. Potatoes evaporated at high tem p.—See XIX.

See also A , J a n , 51, Fe in wines. 124, Formation of H2C20 4 from H C 02H by A. n iger. Citric acid fermentation. 134, Fat in malting products.

P a t e n t s .Apparatus for continuous distillation and recti­

fication of m usts containing acetone, ethyl alcohol, and butyl alcohol. Soc. des E tab l. B arbet (B.P. 419.170, 1.12.33. F r , 1.12.32).—Preheated must passes to a distilling column (I) of two superposed parts, the upper serving to remove C0 Me2, which is led to a rectifier(II) fitted with a reflux condenser, uncondensed vapours being scrubbed with I I20 and returned to (II). EtOH and BuOH pass from the lower part of (I) to a second rectifier (III) for separation by the Barbet continuous processes. The separated mixture of BuOH and H 20 passes by way of a vessel containing CaC03 or alkali for removing PrC02H to a decanter, and the BuOH layer (being above the azeotropic point) can be de­hydrated in a final rectifier (IV). The impure products from (III) and (IV) are returned to the preceding columns, while the residual liquors from (II) and (III) return to a suitable part of (I), together with the pre­heated aq. layer from the decanter. The condensed vapour from (IV) returns partly to the decanter and partly to (III). I. A. P.

Extraction of o ils .—See XII.

XIX .— FOODS.Influence of environment on the carotenoid

content of hard red spring wheat. A. 6 . 0. W h it e ­s id e , J. E d g a r , and C. H. G o u l d e n (Cereal Chem, 1934,

11, 615—625).—Two modifications were introduced into the colorimetric method of Geddes el al. (B , 1934,472): (1) clarifying the suspensions by adding 1 c.c. of a conc. aq. NaOH solution, shaking after a few moments, allow­ing to settle, and filtering; (2) use of a specially con­structed colorimeter. Growth conditions exert an appreciable effect on the carotenoid pigmentation (P ) of wheat flour. P is an inherent characteristic. Those varieties which produced higher carotene vals. ( V) tended to be higher in kernel wt. (K), lower in bushel wt. (B), and higher in protein. Environmental conditions which tended to produce high V also tended to produce low B and low K. E. A. F.

Vitality of wheat. III. Vitality, and the action of heat on wheat seeds. R. W h y m p e r and A. B r a d l e y (Cereal Chem, 1934,11, 625—636 ; cf. B , 1934,1031).— As the % H20 increases, the time of exposure to high temp, must be decreased if the seeds are to survive. Seeds with low initial germinative power (G) appear to lose their vitality (V) more rapidly a t high temp, [e.g., 61° and 67°) than does wheat with a high initial G. Whilst heating from 4S-5° to. 70° for 45 min. partly destroys V, a further heating for 15—30 min. does not continue to destroy V proportionately, but occasionally increases G to slightly < that of the original unheated seeds. The effect of time of heating to 100° on the G of wheat dried over CaCl2 to a H 20 content of 1* 97% was investigated. E. A. F.

Factors influencing the quality of cake flours. L . J. B o h n (Cereal Chem, 1934, 11, 598—614).—Cake (slab, sponge, layer, and angel-food cakes) baking tests on Ontario soft winter wheat flour (F) indicated that(1) the quality of the cake increased with the fineness of grinding, (2) if the flour had not been pretreated with Beta Chlora (Cl2 + 1% N0C1) the cakes sank after being taken from the oven, (3) low-protein F gave better cakes than high-protein F. Glutens that are difficult to wash, but have good elasticity, are desirable. Short patent flours gave lighter, whiter, and more tender cakes than longer patent flours with a higher % protein, fibre, and ash. E. A. F.

[Wheat-flour] viscosity test. E. G. B a y f ie l d (Cereal Chem, 1934,11, 637—647).—Digesting the flour suspension for 1 hr. before making the determination largely eliminated the influence of varying flour granu­lation on the 7] reading. 30° was found to be the most suitable temp, for the digestion. Machine mixing gave more uniform results than hand mixing in a pestle and mortar. Composition (flour or bran ash) as well as quantity of ash affects rr Variable amounts of protein (P) (const, flour wt.) produce large differences in v). The use of a const, wt. of P largely eliminates these differences when one variety of wheat is used ; in this case the ash content must be kept as const, as possible.

E. A. F.[Determination of] flour particle size by the

sedimentation method. M. C. M a r k l e y (Cereal Chem, 1934, 11, 654—660).—A modification of Oden’s weighing method for sedimentation analysis of soils has been applied to flours. E. A. F.

Report of the com m ittee on testing biscuit and cracker flours. R. M. Bohn (Cereal Chem, 1934, 11,

B ritish C hem ical A b s tr a c ts —B .Cl. XIX.—Foons. 171

061—668).—Results of collaborative investigations on the baking and 7) tests are given. E. A- *;

Six years’ farinography. C. _W. B r a b e n d e r (Cereal Chcm., 1934, 11, 586—597 ; cf. B , 1933, 167 , 1934, 424).—An account is given of the results of 6 years experience of the use of the f a r in o g ra p h and fermento- graph.° Survey of test baking procedures employed m America. T. R. A it k e n (Cereal Chem., 1934,,11,648_654).—The survey covers procedures used both, mthe United States and Canada ; particular reference is made to the val. and use of the standard |A A G O. experimental baking procedure (B , 1928, 463 , VddZ, 748), with suggestions for future investigations^ ^ ^

Storage of hulled rice in airtight containers and in carbon dioxide to ascertain the relationship between quality changes and water content. M.Kond6 and T. Okajtora (Proc. Imp. Acad. Tokyo, 1934 10, 528—531).—Storage in airtight containers ot rice ’having 13% of II20 involved min. changes m swelling capacity, flavour, and germmative capacity. In the range 10-16% of H aO, changes m carbohydrate, protein, and ash contents were insignificant. * at, crude fibre, and j»H declined in grain stored with > 14 /<> of H ,0 . Catalase activity decreased with rising i i 2U content. Vitamin-B remained const, with lO—rljJb i but decreased with > 14%, of H ,0 . Storage m CO., had no beneficial effect.

Quality of hulled rice stored for several years in straw bags. M. Kondo and T. Okamura (Proc. Imp. Acad. Tokyo, 1934, 10 , 532- 535).-S to rag e in straw sacks caused loss of germinative capacity and vitamin-B content. Changes in chemical composition were relatively small. The limiting period of safe storage under these conditions was 2 years. .

Milk of abnormal f.p. A. P a w l e t t a and D von W e n t z k y u . P e t e r s h e y d e (Z. Unters. Lebensm, 1 J34 ,¿3 3 5 9 __ 363).—The case is described of an apparentlynormal cow yielding milk of which the f.-p. ^ P ^ 5?1011 was only 0-47°. p n

Vitam in-B supplementation of milk. G- <-• Su p p l e e , R. C. B e n d e r , and G. E. F l a n ig a n (J. Nutri­tion, 1934, 8, 365—375).—Vitamin-B (I) concentrates may be prepared by vac.- or spray-drying ot extracts of rice polishings. (I) used with or without milk improved the efficiency of food utilisation.

Volumetric determination of proteins in milk.E. P a r i s i and G. De V i t o (Annali Chim. AppL, 1934 , 24, 5 0 4 — 512).—Burniana’s method (Le Lait, 1 1214), based on the xanthoprotein reaction, is considered unsatisfactory. Matthaiopoulos’ method (A, 191» , ii 783) gives good results, but is not so simple or certain Is Steineggerl method (A., 1906 , ii, 130), for which the following procedure is recommended : 50 c c oxthe milk are treated with 1 c.c. of 1% phenolphthalem solution, sufficient 0-25V-NaOH to give a distinct pink colour, and 5 c.c. of 4 0 % CII20 made s lg t y re to ph enolphthalein by NaOH. The no. of c.c. of 0- 2 5 i - NaOH required to restore the pink colour, when multi­plied by 0 -9 8 6 , gives the % proteins m the milk

D ete rm in a tio n of a lk a lin e p re se rv a tiv e s in m ilk b y th e a id of th e h y d ro ch lo ric ac id in d ex . J.Vo&fsBK (Chem. Listy, 1934, 28, 315—319).—10 c.c. of conc. IIC1 are added to 100 c.c. of milk, 11 c.c. of the w hey arc evaporated to dryness, tlie residue is ignited, the ash moistened with conc. HC1, heated at 100° to elimination of HC1, dissolved in H N03, and Cl' deter­mined by titration with 0 -lJV-Hg(N03)2 ; the no. oic.c. used is termed the HC1 index (I), and varies from 10 to 13-6 for normal milk. Vais, of > 1 4 occur immediately before or after parturition, and in disease, whilst when I is < 10 the. milk is diluted. When Na2C03 has been added, I increases by 1-89 for every 0-1% of Na2C03 present. R-, i ■

Potatoes evaporated at high temperatures. B.Lam pe and R . D e p la n que (Z. Spiritusind.,^ 1934, 57 , 297— 299).— P otatoes ( P ) au toclaved a t 153° for 1 hr produced no EtOH when fermented with yeast. I1-1 X* aq. sucrose when similarly treated produced 15-7 /o less EtOH than untreated sucrose, owing to caramélis­ation. Caramel could not, however, be detected in the autoclaved P. Wort prepared from P autoclaved at 153° yields slightly more EtOH than that from P autoclaved at 138°. S.

Sources of vitamins. III. Green onions as source of vitam in-C. N. S c h e p i l e v s k a j a (Z. Unters. Lebensm., 1934,68, 389—391). IV. Fresh and salted cucumber and dried carrots as sources of vitamrn- C. N. J a r u s s o v a (Ibid., 391-394). V. Garlic and sorrel as sources of vitam in-C. N. J a r u s s o v a andB. J a n o v s k a j a (Ibid., 394—395). VI. Mandarins, water-m elons, fresh and dried black currants, service [mountain ash] berries, and cranberries as sources of vitamin-C. N. J a r u s s o v a (Ibid., 395—403). VII. Pine needles as sources of vita­m in-C. N. S c h e p i l e v s k a j a (Ibid., 403—406). VIII. Fruit conserves with pine-needle extract anti­scorbutic concentrate. N . J a r u s s o v a (Ibid., 407 408; cf. A., 1931, 399 ; B., 1932, 784).—III. The vitamin-C content of the juice of green onions is 333 units (approx.) per litre.

IV. The -C content of “ Muromskiji ” cucumber (O) is 80—160 units per kg. Salted G and dried carrotscontained none.

V. Garlic (probably predried), stored for several months, contained practically no -C. Sorrel, preserved by prolonged boiling, contained 100—200 units of -C per kg. of preserve. n

VI. Caucasian mandarins contained 450 units ot -O per kg., the flesh of water-melons approx. 90 units, and dried blackcurrants (I), stored for 1 year, 125 units. The juice of fresh (I) was highly active. Service berries contained < 400 units per kg., and fresh cranberries80—160 units.

VII. The -G content of aq. extracts of pine needles(II) = 1600—1800 units per kg. of (II), whether cold or boiling HaO were used for extraction. No harmful effect of the extract was observed in doses 8 times theprophylactic min.

VIII. A fruit conserve, enriched with 10% ot a conc. aq. extract of pine needles, contained 333 units of -C per kg. E* U b-

B ritish C h em ica l A b s tr a c ts —B .

172 Cl . X IX .—F oods.

Vitamin-C content of fruit juices and apples.G. K rauss (Z. Unters. Lebensm., 1934, 68 , 377—389).— Freshly prepared apple juice (A), before it is browned by oxidation, contains vitamin-C, but commercial A and grape juice contain none, even when prepared in the cold. Orangeade also contains -C. The apples tested retained their -C as long as they remained wholesome. E. C. S.

Health problems connected with ethylene treat­m ent of fruits. E. M. Chace (Amer. J. Publ. Health, 1934, 24, 1152—1156).—The effect of C?H4 on the colouring and ripening of various fruits (F ) is described. The vitamin-0 content of F stored in air + C2H4 = tha t of F stored in air alone. The C2H4 process is harmless and is unlikely to lend itself to fraud.

E. C. S.Jam manufacture. A n o n . (Food, 1935, 4, 155—

157).—Jam has a temp, of 104—112° at the end of the boil, and 100° in the cooling pan ; it need not be <1105° at sealing. Changes in pn or rate of inversion, and (except for strawberry jam) rise of solids, are not great during filling. Change in a is a max. during filling, even if the pn is high. Elimination of under- and over­inversion of prepared invert sugar is discussed. A suitable invert sugar is prepared by the action of 250 c.c. of HC1 (d 1-10) on 336 lb. of 200% sugar solution at 89° for 17 min. J. G.

Colorimetric determination of chlorogenic and caffeic acids in roasted coffee. C. M assatsch (Z. Unters. Lebensm., 1934, 6 8 , 437—438).—A reply to criticisms of Pliicker and Keilholz (B., 1934, 985 ; cf. B., 1933, 650, 1081 ; 1934, 40, 524, 700). E. C. S.

Combined refractometric determination of fat and sugar in cocoa and chocolate. W. L eitbe (Z. Unters. Lebensm., 1934, 68 , 369—375).—Finely- divided cocoa or granulated chocolate is shaken with aq, Pb(OAc)2 and C6H6, and centrifuged. The two layers may both be examined refractometrically, or the aq. layer polarimetrically, and the % of fat and sugar calc, as previously described (A., 1934, 1384). E. C. S.

Taint production in the fat of chilled beef.C. H. Lea (J.S.C.I., 1934, 53 , 391—392 t).—Deterior­ation in flavour of the fat of chilled beef may be produced by the agency of micro-organisms, by odour absorption, or by oxidation, the last becoming significant only when the meat is unduly exposed to light, or subjected to the long periods of storage made possible by the use of C02.

Influence of rape oil on the iodine value of p ig’s fat. J. E. Bormann (Rocz. nauk Roln-Lesn., 1933, 30, 126 ; Bicd. Zentr., 1934, A, 4, 582—583).—The I val. of the fat was increased by approx. 10% by feeding rape oil. ‘ A. G. P.

Influence of freezing temperatures on haddock’s m uscle. II. G. A. R e a y (J.S.C.I., 1934, 53, 413— 416 t ; cf. B., 1933, 937).—Max. formation of “ drip ” occurred between —1° and —3°, and the rates of freezing and thawing influenced “ drip ” in the same way, an increase in rate diminishing “ drip.” Since the most important forms of colloidal alteration produced

by freezing (e.g., “ drip,” denaturation of protein, etc.) exhibit maxima between —1° and —5°, the amount of damage done during any temp.-time cycle is approx. dependent on the time spent in this zone of max. change. “ Drip ” is largely myogen sol set free from the muscle cell, and it is suggested that this is accomplished in two ways : (1) initially and rapidly by immediate structural changes due to ice formation, and (2) subsequently and more slowly corresponding to denaturation of the proteins.

Effect of method of manufacture on the nutrient value of fish m eals as determined by growth studies with chicks. P. R . R e c o r d , R . M. B e t h k e , and 0. H. M. W il d e r (J. Agric. Res., 1934, 49, 715— 722).—The vitamin-.S, content of meals is lowered by liigh-temp. drying and by centrifuging prior to drying. Proteins (I) of haddock meal were more efficient in vac.- than in flame-dried material. Fish meal (I) were superior to those of meat meal. The (I) of cod and haddock meal were equally effective. Wet- and dry- rendering processes produced meals of equal val.

A. G. P.Effect of method of manufacture on the nutrient

value of fish m eals as determined by nitrogen balance of rats. 0. H. M. W il d e r , R . M. B e t h k e , and P. R . R ec o r d (J. Agric. Res., 1934,49, 723—730).— The digestibility (I) of liaddock-meal protein was lowered by higli-temp. drying. Utilisation of absorbed N (II) was the same for steam- (HI) and vac.-dried meals(IV), but was somewhat higher for wet- than for dry- rendered material. The latter contained higher propor­tions of low-valued, II20-sol. N. The (I) of (III) was slightly that of (IV). Meal from waste edible portions of haddock (backbones) was superior in (I) and in (II) to tha t of whole waste or “ heads and tails.” Wet- rendered (IV) from haddock was superior to that from cod. A. G. P.

Determination of the digestibility of the proteins of blood meal and of fish m eals rich in fat. H.W e w e r s (Angew. Chem., 1934, 47, 822—823).—Dis­crepancies in determinations of protein digestibility (I) of blood meals result from the inhibitory effect on the digestive process of the relatively large proportion of peptone present. Reproducible results, showing 90— 95% (I), are obtained by use of smaller test samples. In the case of fish meals, preliminary removal of the majority of the fat leads to more satisfactory results [80—90% (I)]. A. G. P.

Lake vegetation as a possible source of forage.R . A. G o r t n e r (Science, 1934,80, 531—533).—Analyses of vegetation from representative Minnesota lakes are recorded. High ash and protein and low “ crude-fibre ” contents are the characteristics. L. S. T.

Optical m ethods in food technology. A. L.B a c h a r a c h (Chem. & Ind., 1934, 1071—1072).—Applic­ations of refraction, diffraction, absorption, scattering, polarisation, and electrical effects are summarised.

C. W. G.Use of fluorescence analysis in ultra-violet light

in the food industry. J. G r a n t (Chem. & Ind., 1934, 1074-—1075).—Among applications mentioned are :

B ritish C hem ical A b s tr a c ts—B .Cl. XX.— M e d i c i n a l S u b s t a n c e s ; E s s e n t i a l O i l s . 173

detection of chicory and taraxacum in coffee, examin­ation of seeds, improvement of the Gutzeit test for As, titration in coloured media with fluorescent indicators.

C. W. G.Application of X-ray methods in the food

industry. J. D. Bernal (Chem. & Ind., 1934, 1075— 1077).—A brief survey of applications to structural problems of carbohydrates, proteins, and vitamins.

C. W. G.Bacteriology of [food] canning. III . S. L ance-

field (Food, 1935, 4 , 171—172 ; cf. B., 1935, 44).— The classification, propagation, and thermal limits of bacteria which cause food spoilage are discussed.

J. G.Spray-drying. Food-plant design. Zeiss photo­

meter.—See I. Detecting margarine etc. in food­stuffs. Edible oils.—See XII. Pecan nuts. I in vegetables.—See XVI. Microscopy of food prod­ucts. Wheat starches.—See XVII. Tea-tree oils. —See XX.

See also A., Jan., 32, Pectin jelly formation. 33, Physical chem istry of starch and bread-making. 52, Determining CT in sap of plants etc. 64, Cacao butter. 66, Determining citric acid in fruit- juice preps. 70, Prep, of d-glutamic acid. 105, Changes in the acid-base coeff. of m eat during storage. 129—131, Vitamins.

P atents.Flalced-cereal beverage product. R. B. McK in n is ,

Assr. to Continental Can Co., I nc . (U.S.P. 1,956,427,24.4.34. Appl., 3.4.33).—The sol. portion of a cereal beverage is rendered easily extractable by tempering the roasted grain mixture with H20 and passing through rollers under high pressure to form flakes 0-001 in. thick. E. B. H.

Preservation of the m ilk product known as “ skyr.” I. G. S. E spholin (B.P. 420,856, 11.1.34).— This Icelandic soured milk product is subjected to quick freezing to between —12° and —15° and stored a t such temp. E. B. H.

Preservation of foods and beverages. M. A. O’Callaghan (B.P. 420,286, 14.7.34).—Infusions of leaves of Ilex paraguayensis (yerba maté) have a preservative action when mixed with foods and beverages, especially those containing protein. Methods of preparing such infusions are described. E. B. H.

Manufacture of cheese. R. F e ix , Assee. of Pomosin W e rk e G-M.b .H. (B.P. 420,563, 3.3.34. Ger., 6.3.33 and 20.1.34).—A stable, homogeneous cheese is obtained by adding pectin (I) with the rennet during manufacture and allowing curdling at a low temp. (9—16°). Alternatively, (I) may be worked in thecurd prior to pressing. E. B. II.

Preparation of coffee. H. H euser (U.S.P. 1,956,290,24.4.34. Appl., 16.11.32).—Coffee can be preserved from staling by oxidation by means of a harmless reduc­ing agent (Na pyrosulphite ; 0-3% on wt. of berries), as a solid with ground coffee, dissolved in the H 20 of prep., or as a gas (S02) around whole berries. E. B. H.

Preparation of food flavours, extracts, and juices. J. B. R olle, Assr. to Garoni P roducts Co.

(U.S.P. 1,956,362, 24.4.34. Appl., 19.8.29).—The liquid distilled from a mixture of garlic (I) or onion (II), maize oil, and H 20 at 49—71° is used for flavouring foods. The juices are prepared by covering (I) or (II) with some of the distillate, keeping for 24 hr. a t <ć 15°, and pressing off the juice. E. B. H.

Spice product. R. B. McK in n is , Assr. to Contin­ental Can Co ., I nc. (U.S.P. 1,956,426, 24.4.34. Appl.,27.3.33).—The spices are softened by exposure to 1I20 vapour and flattened between rollers to give a flaky product, approx. 0-001 in. thick. E. B. II.

[Withering] treatment of tea leaf. G. jST. Thomson (B.P. 421,411, 15.6.33).

Protein.—See V. Emulsions of edible oils.—See XII.

X X — MEDICINAL SU BSTA N C ES; ESSENTIAL OILS.Ultra-violet rays as a test for the stability of

anaisthetic ether. S. G. L iversedge (Analyst, 1934, 59, 815).—The sample of E t20, contained in a white glass-stoppered bottle or cylinder, is irradiated with the light from an ultra-violet lamp for 1 hr., and is then tested for peroxides. There appears to be a relation between the heat and light tests for stability.

E. C. S.Determining acetylsalicylic acid in presence of

medicinal products. R. M. H itchens (J. Amer. Pharm. Assoc., 1934, 23, 1084—1088).—Acetylsalicylic acid (I), but no other drug with the exception of phenolphthalein (II), is extracted from CHC13 solution by dii. NallCOg. (II) may be removed by extraction with EtOAc ; immediate acidification, followed by extraction with EtOAc, then yields (I) quantitatively. A. E. 0.

Determination of salol in tablets. M. Oxe andB. JT. J ensen (Dansk Tidsskr. Farm., 1934, 8, 321— 357)..—Salol (I) determinations in powdered tablets by Soxhlet extraction and by direct extraction (II) are in agreement, but with whole tablets (II) gives low vals. II20 can be determined by drying in vacuo over H 2S04 for 14 days. The influence of the moistening agent and the binder on the disintegration of tablets is discussed, and a formula using 2% gelatin solution is suggested. Loss of (I) by exposure is negligible. E. H. S.

Inositolphosphoric acid compounds. S. Otolski (Przemysł Chem., 1934, 18, 519—531).—A review. The prep, of inositolphosphates from various vegetable products is described in detail. R- T.

Barbiturates. III. Chemical assay of barbitur­ates. J. M. D ille and T. K oppanyi (J. Amer. Pharm. Assoc., 1934, 23, 1079—1084 ; cf. A., 1934, 1254).— The colorimetric method using Co(OAc)2 and NILjPr'* in MeOH is satisfactory for the determination of barbitur­ates (I) in commercial preps, and of the approx. mol. wts. of (I). A. E. O.

Stabilisation of fluid extract of ergot. E. H.Stuart and F. E. B ibbins (J. Amer. Pharm. Assoc., 1934, 23, 1104—1110).—The quinhydrone electrode should be used for determining the pa of extract ofergot (I). The effect of various factors on the stability of (I) is discussed. A- E- 0.

B ritish C h em ical A b s tr a c ts—B .

1 7 4 Cl. XX.— M e d i c i n a l S u b s t a n c e s ; E s s e n t i a l O i l s .

Testing of ergot. H. H. Ckosbie (J. Amer. Pharm. Assoc., 1934, 23, 1110—1112).—A reliable photographic modification of the cock’s-comb method is described.

A. E. 0.Physical properties of neoarsphenamine powder.

A. E. J urist , J . R. Van W in kle , and W. G. Christian­sen (J. Amer. Pharm. Assoc., 1934, 23, 1094—1097).

Distribution of nicotine in raw tobacco. T. B.Andreadis and E. J. Toole (Z. Unters. Lebensm., 1934, 68, 431—437).—The max. nicotine (Ar) content is in the middle (third- and fourth-hand) leaves. The N content of the red-brown leaves is that of the clear- coloured. The N content of any one leaf increases from the midrib outwards, and from the stalk to the tip.

E. C. S.Nicotine in cigarette sm oke. IV. C. P yriki

(Z. Unters. Lebensm., 1934, 68, 420—431; cf. B., 1933, 764).—When the main smoke stream (£) is acid, the decomp. (D) of nicotine (N) in the glowing region is > when jS is alkaline. When S is strongly alkaline, nearly all the N appears unchanged in the smoke. When the cigarette is completely smoked D is > when a bu tt is left. N accumulates in the butt, and to a greater extent when S is alkaline. The II20 content of the tobacco has little effect on D, but has some influence on the partition of N. Data for the latter with, acid and alkaline S are given. NH3 in the smoke = > 50% of the total N. Most of the NH3 is in the secondary stream. E. C. S.

Theoretical basis of determination of distribution of nicotine in cigarette sm oke. A. W enusch (Z. Unters. Lebensm., 1934, 68, 412—420).—The factors determining the % of the nicotine (N) of a cigarette which is actually drawn into the mouth are discussed in explanation of previous results (cf. B., 1934, 780, 812). The effect of combination of N with various acids on the rate of glowing of a model cigarette, and on the %"of N in the smoke, is investigated. E. C. S.

Australian tea-tree oils. A. R. P enfold andF. R. Morrison (Perf. Ess. Oil Rec., 1934,25, 374— 377). —The applications of the oils from Melaleuca linariifolia and M. altemifolia are discussed (cf. B., 1930, 685).

' E. H. S.Mexican and Indian linaloe oils. W. H. S immons

(Perf. Ess. Oil Rec., 1934,25, 378—379).—The following typical analyses of Mexican and Indian oils, respectively, are given. Wood oils: dl0 0-876—0-892, 0-88S7— 0-8981 ; a —3° to —15° (rarely slightly dextro), -(-1° 0' to + 2° 30 '; m25 1-456—1-462, 1-4602—1-4628;esters (as linalyl acetate) 1—8%, 34-4—41-6%: alcohols (as linalool) 54—66%, 73-3—76-1%. Seed oils f d15 0-8720—0-8901, 0-8S7S—0-8911 : a —5° 48' to +8° 24', —0° 18' to +2° 18 '; m25 1-4628—1-4669, 1 • 4600—1 • 4623 ; esters 12 • 6—29 • 2%, 31 ■ 5—44 • 1 % : alcohols 51 -0—65-9%, 71 -8—74-7%. E. H. S.

Microscopy [of oils etc .].—See I. Detecting other alcohols in EtOH.—See III. Halibut-liver oil.— See XII.

See also A., Jan., 66, Sb em etics. Oil of violet leaves. 72, M icrochemistry of adaline. 79, Prep, of germ icides. Relation between chemical con­stitution and purgative action. S2, Chaulmoogric

acids and their derivatives. 97—99, Alkaloids.102, Determining nicotine. Reagents for aconite alkaloids. 126, Ag picrate. 128, Prep, of gonado­tropic extracts of urine. 127, Corpus luteum hormone. 129—131, Vitamins. 132, Indian medicinal plants (T e ra m u s lab ia lis). 133, Alka­loids accompanying nicotine, and their determin­ation. Determining nicotine in tobacco.

P a t e n t s .

Therapeutical application of m etals [zinc].Me t a l l is a t io n , L t d ., and W. E. B a l l a r d (B .P . 416,855,20.3.33).—Zn or a Zn alloy is sprayed on the affected parts of the body by means of a Schoop pistol, using ozonised air as the spraying gas. A. R. P.

[Manufacture of] germicidal preparation. E.K l a r m a n n , Assr. to L e h n & F in k , I n c . (U.S.P. 1,953,413, 3.4.34. Appl., 10.8.32).—Manufacture of aq. dispersions (soap) of y-teri.-amylphenol, alone, or together with other phenols (PliOH, cresol, xylenol, and their Cl-derivatives), is claimed. H. A. P.

[Analgesic] compositions containing an alkyl salicylate and an alkaii stearate. F . W. N i t a r d y , Assr. to E. R. Squibb & Sons (U .S.P. 1,951,737, 20.3.34. Appl., 31.3.33).—The stability of these compositions is improved by addition of an alkali (K) or NH4 [N(C2H,-0H)3] oleate (> 5%). H. A. P.

Manufacture of colloidal suspensions [of hera- pathite]. E. H. L a n d (U.S.P. 1,951,664, 20.3.34. Appl., 3.12.32).—To quinine II sulphate (l-5.ptsi.-J in MeOH (40 pts.) is added with stirring 20% I in EtOH (0-525 pt. 1). Stirring is continued until cold. The gel produced is stabilised, if desired, by addition of (highly) nitrated cellulose in a non-solvent for the product (Et, Bu, or amyl acetate). H. A. P.

Recovery of carotene from green leafy plant m aterials. H. N. H o l m e s and H . M. L e ic e s t e r , Assrs. to S. M. A. Co r p . (U.S.P. 1,953,607, 3.4.34. Appl.,31.7.31).—The raw material is cooked, hydrolysed with (3AT-) aq. NaOH or KOH at room temp., and extracted with CHC13. The crude product from CHC13 is purified, if desired, by dissolution in light petroleum and extrac­tion (1) with 80—90% aq. MeOH, which removes xanthophyll, and (2) with abs. MeOH, which coagulates fatty materials ; the solution is then filtered and allowed to crystallise. H. A. P.

Preparation of products from toad poisons.H. J e n s e n and K. K. Ch k n , Assrs. to E. L il l y & Co. (U.S.P. 1,951,870, 20.3.34. Appl., 1.3.32).—The dried poison (6 pts.) is extracted with EtOH or C0Me2 and the extract evaporated in a vac. The dried extract is extracted with H20 (7—S pts.), and the filtrate shaken with CHC13, BuOH, or CsHu -OH ; the bufotenine in the aq. layer is then pptd. as flavianate or picrate. The org. layer is evaporated in a vac. a t low temp., the residue dissolved in MeOH or EtOH, and the bufotoxin pptd. with E t20 or HaO ; it is purified by repetition of this process and crystallisation from 75% EtOH. Bufagin is recovered by evaporation of the E t0 H -E t20 mother - liquors and purified by extraction from aq. EtOH with

B ritish C hem ica l A b s tr a c ts —B .

Cl. X X I.—P h o t o g r a p h i c M a t e r ia l s a n d P r o c e s s e s . Cl. X X I I —E x p l o s i v e s ; M a t c h e s . 175

CHC13-E t20, fractional pptn. from E t0 H -E t20 with light petroleum, and crystallisation from 80% EtOH.

H. A. P.[Preparation of] mercury compound[s] of nitro-

o-cresols. G. W. R a iz is s , Assr. to A b b o tt L a bo r­a t o r ie s (U.S.P. 1,953,263, 3.4.34. A p p l., 21.6.32).— The 3-HgOAc derivative of 2 : 1 : 5-0H,C6H3Me,N 02, m.p. 275°, and its anhydro-base are described. Salts and <?i'wereim'-compounds are claimed. H. A. P.

[Manufacture of] mercury derivatives of sub­stitution products of diphenylphenolphthalein.S. E. H a r r is and W. G. Ch r is t ia n s e n , Assrs. to E. R . S q u ib b & So n s (U.S.P. 1,952,166, 27.3.34. Appl.,23.5.31).—The HgOAc derivative of dibromo- and the (HgOAc)2 derivative of dinitro-3' : 3"-diphenylphenol- phthalein are described. (Cf. U.S.P. 1,922,240; B.,1934, 556.) H. A. P.

[Apparatus for] treatment of tobacco [with rays]. M. Wix and S. W. B u n k e r (B.P. 421,487,12.7.33).

X X I.— PHOTOGRAPHIC MATERIALS AND PROCESSES.

Graininess and resolving power of photographic em ulsions. A. V a n K r e v e l d (Phot. J., 1934, 74, 590—596).—Theoretical. Five new magnitudes for measurement of photographic properties are proposed : y j — gradation at a given density ; y, = total gradation,i.e., the tangent of the angle between the intensity co-ordinate and the straight line between points near the beginning and top of the density curve, thus averag­ing the curve ; AD = average oscillation of density (of a given nearly straight-line portion of a microphoto­gram); G = apparent grain size; L = turbidity, measured by the distance in the emulsion where the intensity of the scattered light is half the incident intensity. The measurement of these magnitudes is discussed and their application in the measurement of the quality “ Q ” for any given application, e.g., narrow or broad spectral lines, enlargement, lantern slides, sound tracks, is described. The practical applications of the formula: obtained to wave-length of exposing light, exposure time, development, type of emulsion, etc. are briefly discussed. J. L.

Dufaycolour process. F. F. R e x w ic k (Phot, J.,1935, 75, 28—35).—Advantages and difficulties of the process, particularly with regard to making copies, are described. J. L.

Spectral reflexion density of various white m etals. G. G e o g h e g a n (Brit. J. Phot., 1934, 81, Col. Suppl., 45—46).—The reflecting power of metal mirrors (as used in one-exposure tri-colour cameras) was measured as reflexion density, compared with MgO (taken as 100%). Electro-Ag is much the best reflector (53-5%), though it shows a distinct falling off forreflexion of blue light. Monel metal reflects best inthe green portion. J. L.

See also A., Jan., 47, Reversals in the solarisation region. Action of elements and compounds on plates. Ultra-short-tim e [exposure] effects.

P a t e n t s .Manufacture of photographic sensitising dyes.

I. G. F a r b e n in d . A.-G. (B.P. 418,561, 19.1.33. Ger.,19.1.32).—Manufacture of the dyes used in B.P. 416,664 (B., 1934, 1085) is described. Additional examples are :2-hydroxy- (I) + l-formyl-2-hydroxy-thionaphthen (II) (HC1 in AcOH as condensing agent), (I) (2 mols) +CC14 (NaOEt), 2 - hydroxyselenonaphthen + 5 - chloro -1 - formyl-2-hydroxy-3-methylthionaphthen, 4-Cl-derivative of (I) + CMe(OEt)3 (NaOMe), and (II) -f- 2-hydroxy- 3 : 4-benzotliionaphthen. H. A. P.

Developers and intensifiers for ferroprussiate or blue prints. J. H a l d e n & Co., L td ., and J. H o l d e n (B.P. 420,901, 6.4.33).—An oxidising and intensifying developer for blue prints is made of NaB03 and an acid in the dry state, e.g., tartaric, citric, boric. Pro­portions of about 1 : 4 are suitable. Aids to solubility, e.g., Na2S04j binders, stabilisers, etc. may be added on making the mixture into tablets. Such developer is not staining or injurious. J. L.

Colour photography. D. F. Co m sto ck (U.S.P.1,956,274, 24.4.34. Appl., 4.11.30).—A support is coated with a red-sensitive emulsion layer and a green- sensitive layer on top, with a coating of red filter dye in between. After exposure, the plate is developed in a “ white ” developer (I) [quinol, Na2S03, and (NH4)2C03], giving, as in tin-types, reflecting permanent white images. Each colour-separation image is then “ printed by reflexion,” i.e., photographed, giving negative colour records. The dye layer prevents reflexion from the second image from interfering while each one is photo­graphed. Coloured gelatin relief images are printed in the usual manner from the negatives obtained. Instead of using (I), the 2-colour plate may be developed ordinarily and the images subsequently toned white with, e.g., Pb bleaching solution J. L.

Dichromatic recording and projection of im ages in natural colours. G. G u a l t ie r o t t i (U.S.P. 1,955,804, 24.4.34. Appl., 22.3.30. It,, 2.4.29). —For 2-colour reproduction the images are taken through the usual red and blue-green filters ; on pro­jection the “ red ” image passes through a filter trans­mitting red, yellow, and green, and the other image passes through a filter which is almost colourless but has a slight haze of an intermediate spectral zone colour as well as the pale blue-green. J. L.

Fireproof screen for projected im ages. E. H.N o l l a u , Assr. to E. I. Du P o n t d e N e m o u r s & Co. (U.S.P. 1,955,888, 24.4.34. Appl, 3.9.30).—A white, matt, reflecting composition, coated on a fireproofed fabric base, consists of white pigment, (C6H4Me)3P 04, and NH4 Mg phosphate (and/or an NH4 metal arsenate) ground in a special pyroxylin dispersion (cellulose nitrate in 40 : 60 EtOAc-EtOH mixture), this mixture then bein'; mixed with more cellulose nitrate dispersion.

J. L.

X X II.— EX PLO SIV ES; MATCHES.Explosive properties of starch nitrates. J.

H a c k e l and T. U r b a n s k i (Przemysi Chem., 1934, 18, 398—401).—A study of the explosive properties (I) of starch nitrates (II), as expressed by the velocity of

B ritish C hem ical A b s tr a c ts —B.

1 7 6 Cl. XXIII.— S a n i t a t i o n ; W a t e r P u r i f i c a t i o n .

detonation, the Pb block test, brisance, and the sensitivity to shock, indicates that (I) augment with the N content, and that (II) containing < 9% N have no practical val. as explosives, whilst the (I) of (II)

■ containing 9% N are comparable with those of 'C6H aMe(N02)3 and H0-C6H 2(N02)3. R. T.

See also A., Jan., 50, Prep, of NH4N3.

P a t e n t .

Production of [free-flowing] diazodinitrophenol.R. S. H ancock and L. C. P ritchett , Assrs. to H ercules Powder Co. (U.S.P. 1,952,591, 27.3.34. Appl., 1.7.32).— An acid is added gradually to a solution or suspension of a picramate and a nitrite at 10— 16°. B . A. P.

XXIII.— SANITATION ; W ATER PURIFICATION.[Seventh annual] report of the Water Pollution

Research Board. (Dept. Sci. Ind. Res., 1934, 44 pp.). —The base-exchange vals. of certain natural zeolites are40—60% that of an artificial product when used for the removal of Ca and 60—85% when dealing with Mg. Milk wastes (1%) can be successfully treated in septic tanks and on percolating filters, and soap concns. > 250 p.p.m. can also be readily oxidised thereon. In presence of activated sludge it is possible to oxidise solutions containing sugars, NH2-acids, formates, lact­ates, glycerol, and olive oil, but not PhOH. Finely- divided streams of air, 0 2, II2, or N2 when passed through sewage for several hr. a t 25° cause a considerable coagu­lation of dispersed material, some particles of which were so small as to pass an ultra-filter. C. J.

Chemical and bacteriological examination of water. B. V o e l c k e r (Analyst, 1934, 59, 816—817).— A sample of H20 containing B. coli gave satisfactory results when analysed chemically. The case is dis­cussed from the viewpoint of the two analytical methods.

E. C. S.Water purification b y ozone. T. R ich (Engineering,

1935,139, 9—11).—This process produces a well-aerated and sterile H 20, free from unpleasant tastes and odours, and avoids additions of mineral matter. Suitable plant and typical installations are described. C. J.

Rapid micro-determination of phosphoric acid in waters, for sanitary purposes. G. B uogo (L’Ind. Chimica, 1934, 9, 1481—1482).—The following modific­ation of Briggs’ method serves to determine H3P 0 4 in II20 containing < 1 mg. per litre. To 10 c.c, of the II20 are added 1 c.c. of 5% aq. (NTl4)2Mo04 containing 15% II2S04, 1 c.c. of 1% aq. quinol slightly acidified with HOI, and 1 c.c. of 20% aq. Na2S03. The colour produced is matched against a standard. H3P 0 4 may also be determined nephelometrically, pptn. being carried out by means of Antoniani’s reagent (A., 1928, 979).

D. R. D.Determination of sulphide-sulphur, especially in

effluents. K. V ie h l (Chem.-Ztg., 1934, 58, 1041).— 100 c.c.' of the II20 are boiled gently for 10 min. with 5 c.c. of 2iY-H2S04 and the colour developed in a piece of Pb(0Ac)2 paper held in the neck of the flask by a brass clip is compared, after drying, with standards. The method is suitable for determining 0-2—0-8 mg. of H2S per litre. C. 1.

C2H4 treatment of fruits, and health.—See XIX.See also A., Jan., 53, Determining CO [in air].

101, Determining org. As compounds in air. 126, Apparatus for purification of air.

P a t e n t s .

Dry disinfection of the atmosphere. W. II. P arkin (B.P. 415,405, 22.2.33).—Claim is made for a mixture of a salt (I) of an oxy-acid of Cl, paraformaldehyde (II), a substance which decomposes (I) to produce Cl2 and 0 2, whereby CH20 vapours are evolved, and various essential oils, with or without an absorbent material, e.g., Ca(OCl)2 0-5, (II) 12, H3B 03 3, thymol 0-5, lavender oil 5, and wTood dust or kaolin 20 pts. A. R. P.

[Vaporisation of liquid] disinfecting or fum igat­ing [agents]. H . M. R o b e r t s , C. G. H a r r is , and I m p e r ia l Ch e m . I n d u s t r ie s , L t d . (B.P. 418,200,21.3.33). —An apparatus for fumigating closed spaces is described.

A. R. P.Treating sewage. G. H. G le a so n and A. C. L o on a m ,

Assrs. to G u g g e n h e im B r o s . (U.S.P. 1,956,420, 24.4.34. Appl., 22.5.33).—The sewage is treated with Fe2(S04)3 and aerated for several min. {pn <£ 5-0), sufficient Ca(OH)2 is then added to raise the pn to > 9 - 0 , and the floe produced is removed in sedimentation tanks in which the liquor enters at the bottom beneath a blanket of previously deposited sludge which acts as a strainer (ef. B ., 1934, 654). C. J.

Sewage disposal. W. K. P o r t e o u s (B.P. 420,720,18.11.33).—In the wet-carbonising method for treating sewage sludge, a series of receptacles is arranged between the heating and cooling portions of the recuperator (R ) so that while one is being charged from R another is being emptied through R to the filter-presses and others are being heated for the treatment of the sludge therein. C. J.

Disposal of sewage. C. E. L y o n , Assr. to C. N. W in d e c k e r (U.S.P. 1,956,463, 24.4.34. Appl., 16.5.32). —Cone, sewage sludge is chlorinated (1000 p.p.m.) and the flocculated sterile product returned to the raw sewage which it sterilises and also assists in the separation of finely-divided suspended solids. The cycle is repeated, any excess sludge forming an easily-dried and entirely unobjectionable product. C. J.

Sewage-disposal plant. G. H . G u n n (B.P. 420,826,8.6.33).—In a small installation the sewage is deposited directly into a closed digestion chamber of wedge-shaped vertical section, fitted with gas traps and so arranged that the lower portions of the contents are transferred automatically by a partly submerged overflow' pipe into a second chamber, wThich in turn leads to another with semi-porous walls which permit the liquid to escape into the surrounding ground. C. J.

Water-filtration plant. Ca r p e t T r a d e s , L t d .,H. G. S w ir e , J. R . and J. C. D y so n (B.P. 420,822,1.6.33).—Means are provided whereby a coagulant, e.g., aluminoferric solution, is atomised before it is introduced into the H ,0 supply on the inlet side of a pump, and prior to upward-filtration through a layer of wood-wool.

C. J.0 2-evolving substances.—See VII.